JP6744631B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko gaming machine and the like.

Some pachinko game machines have various winning openings such as a starting opening (ball entrance), a special winning opening (special winning opening), and a normal winning opening as described in Patent Document 1 below. The starting openings include a fixed starting opening that does not change the ease of entering the ball and a variable starting opening that allows the ease of entering the ball to change. The variable start port is for making it easy for a game ball to enter based on the operation of a normal electric accessory (so-called electric chew). The special winning opening is opened based on the operation of the special electric accessory.

The player can win a prize ball if the flowing down game ball enters each prize hole. Note that the number of prize balls that the player obtains when one game ball enters is predetermined for each prize hole. On the other hand, when the flowing down game ball enters an out port different from each winning port, the player cannot acquire the prize ball.

JP, 2005-208555, A

By the way, in a pachinko gaming machine, it is designed to inspect in advance whether or not the base is within a normal range and whether or not the output rate exceeds a specified value. The base (specific ratio value) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls obtained by the player to the number of balls to be emitted, which is the number of game balls to be emitted by the player. Proportion (specific ratio value) is the number of prize balls obtained based on the operation of a prize (ordinary electric prize, special electric prize, etc.) among the total prize balls obtained by the player It is the ratio of the number. If the base or the outlying rate is out of the normal range, it becomes a pachinko game machine that can give excessive profits or disadvantages to the player. Therefore, an appropriate pachinko game machine is installed in the hall by preliminarily inspecting the base and the proportion.

However, in recent years, some pachinko machines installed in halls have been modified illegally, or due to the occurrence of malfunctions or malfunctions, the specific ratio values such as the base and the ratio have become abnormal. there were. In other words, there was a pachinko game machine in which a specific percentage value such as a base or an outflow rate was significantly different from the value when it was inspected. Therefore, as a countermeasure for the above, a pachinko gaming machine capable of confirming a specific ratio value is required.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the problem is to provide a gaming machine capable of confirming the base .

The present invention takes the following means in order to solve the above problems .

The gaming machine of the present invention,
In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined control condition , and can be controlled to a normal game state or a privilege game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ,
Total award ball number measuring means capable of measuring the total award ball number obtained by the player,
A shooting ball number measuring means capable of measuring the number of shooting balls that the game balls shot by the player have flowed down in the game area,
A memory capable of storing at least the normal total prize ball number measured by the total prize ball number measuring means in the normal game state and the normal launch ball number measured by the fire ball number measuring means in the normal game state. Means and
Have a first display region and second display region, display means normally based capable of displaying a fraction of the normal total prize balls count and the normal firing cell count,
A power-on means capable of powering on,
A main control board having a game CPU for controlling the progress of the game and capable of storing processing information of the game CPU;
A RAM clear operation means capable of erasing the stored processing information of the game CPU when an operation is performed in response to the power being turned on by the power-on means,
The storage means is capable of holding the stored contents of the normal total prize ball count and the normal shot ball count even if the RAM clear operation means is operated in response to power-on by the power-on means.
The display means is
When the predetermined display condition is not satisfied, the mode in the first display area is changed to a non-numeric mode different from the numerical mode indicating the normal base ,
In the case where the display condition is satisfied, the number of normally-launched balls stored in the storage means when the power is turned on is measured by the number-of-launched ball measuring means after the power is turned on. If the added value obtained by adding the number of normal firing balls is less than a predetermined number, a mode in the first display area is changed to a mode in which the normal base is displayed, and The aspect is a first aspect indicating that the normal base is a reference value calculated in a situation where the added value is less than the predetermined number,
In the case where the display condition is satisfied, the number of normally-launched balls stored in the storage means when the power is turned on is measured by the number-of-launched ball measuring means after the power is turned on. When the added value obtained by adding the number of normal firing balls is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the aspect in the second display area is changed while the aspect in the first display area is set to the numeral aspect indicating the normal base. Usually the base is a game machine, wherein the Ru can der to a second aspect indicating that the added value is computed effective value in the situation is the predetermined number or more.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to confirm the base .

It is a perspective view of the game machine concerning the 1st form of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing a state in which a gaming machine frame of the gaming machine is opened. It is a front view of a game board provided in the same gaming machine. It is a front view showing in detail a second big winning device included in the same gaming machine. It is an enlarged front view of a game display provided in the same gaming machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a main control board and a main board case included in the gaming machine. It is a perspective view showing the back side of the gaming machine. It is an enlarged front view of a ratio display provided in the same gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a sub-control board side of the same gaming machine. (A) is a prize ball counter addition table, (B) is a diagram showing each storage unit and each storage region of the game RAM, (C) is a diagram showing each counter and each storage region of the special memory Is. It is a figure which shows the connection state of each light-emitting part for games with which a game indicator is equipped. It is a figure which shows the connection state of each lighting part for output ratio with which a power output indicator is provided. It is a diagram showing the wiring around the game control microcomputer. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 1st form. It is a figure showing dynamic lighting control in a game indicator. It is a figure which shows the case where the light emission state of each game light emission part or the light emission state of each output lighting part is cleared. It is a figure which shows the case where a 1st light emission area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each game light-emitting part of a 1st light emission area is light-emitted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 2nd light emission area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each game light-emitting part of a 2nd light emission area is light-emitted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 3rd light emission area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each game light-emitting part of a 3rd light emission area is light-emitted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 4th light emission area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each game light-emitting part of a 4th light emission area is light-emitted. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control in a power output indicator. It is a figure which shows the case where a 1st lighting area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each output lighting part of a 1st lighting area is lighted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 2nd lighting area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each output lighting part of a 2nd lighting area is lighted. It is a figure which shows the case where a 3rd lighting area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting part for output ratio of a 3rd lighting area is lighted. It is a figure which shows the case where the 4th lighting area is selected. It is a figure which shows the case where each lighting part for output ratio of a 4th lighting area is lighted. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of a 1st comparative example. It is a figure which shows the dynamic lighting control of a 2nd comparative example. It is a hit type determination table. It is a table showing various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a big hit determination table, (B) is a reach determination table, (C) is a normal symbol hit determination table, (D) is a normal symbol variation pattern selection table. It is a special figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is an opening pattern determination table of the electric chu. It is a flow chart of main control main processing. It is a flow chart of processing at the time of power-on. It is a flow chart of main side timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of an input process. It is a flow chart of prize ball number counter addition processing. It is a flow chart of proportion calculation processing. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flow chart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of special electric auditors product processing (big hit game). It is a flowchart of an output process. It is a flow chart of game display processing. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing. It is a flow chart of power failure monitoring processing. It is a flow chart of sub-control main processing. It is a flow chart of reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart of 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a figure which shows the clear image displayed on a display screen. It is a figure which shows the outlet sensor of the modification of 1st form. It is a figure which shows the electrical connection state of the outlet sensor of the modification of 1st form. (A) is a figure which shows the prize ball counter addition table of the modification of a 1st form, (B) is a figure which shows each memory|storage part and each memory area of the game RAM of the modification of a 1st form. , (C) are diagrams showing each counter and each storage area of the modified example of the first embodiment. It is a flow chart of input processing of a modification of the 1st form. It is a flow chart of counter addition processing of the modification of the 1st form. It is a flow chart of base operation processing of the modification of the 1st form. It is a flow chart of output processing of a modification of the 1st form. It is a flow chart of base display processing of the modification of the 1st form. It is a flow chart of base display processing of the modification of the 1st form. It is a flow chart of base display processing of the modification of the 1st form. It is a flow chart of base display processing of the modification of the 1st form. (A) is a diagram showing each storage unit, each storage region, and each counter of the game RAM of the second form, and (B) is a diagram showing each storage region of the special memory of the second form. It is a flowchart of the power-on process of the second form. It is a flow chart of a prize ball number counter addition processing of the 2nd form. It is a flow chart of the power failure monitoring processing of the 2nd form. (A) is a diagram showing each storage unit, each storage area, and each counter of the game RAM of the modification of the second embodiment, and (B) shows each storage area of the special memory of the modification of the second embodiment. It is a figure. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of power activation of the modification of the 2nd form. It is a figure showing the state where the back side case of the 3rd form rotates. It is a figure showing the state where the back side case of the 1st modification of the 3rd form rotates. It is a figure showing the state where the back side case of the 2nd modification of the 3rd form slides. It is a figure showing the state where the back side case of the 3rd modification of the 3rd form slides. It is a figure which shows the state which the external appearance ratio display apparatus of 4th form can be attached or detached to the connector of a main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the main control board of 4th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of 4th form. It is a flow chart of input processing of the 4th form. It is a flow chart of output processing of the 4th form. It is a flow chart of input processing of a modification of the 4th form. It is a figure which shows the display mode when not displaying an output ratio on an output display in a 5th form. It is a flow chart of the output processing of the 5th form. It is a flow chart of the display change processing of the 5th form. It is a flow chart of output processing of a modification of the 5th form. It is a figure which shows each aspect of the main control board and special LED of a 6th form. It is a flow chart of the output processing of the 6th form. It is a flow chart of special LED processing of the 6th form. It is a flow chart of output processing of a modification of the 6th form. It is a flow chart of special LED processing of the modification of the 6th form. It is a figure which shows each aspect of the main control board and special LED of a 7th form. It is a simple abnormality determination table of the 7th form. It is a flow chart of the input processing of the 7th form. It is a flow chart of the simple abnormality determination processing of the 7th form. It is a flow chart of the output processing of the 7th form. It is a flow chart of the special LED processing of the 7th form. (A) is a normal simple abnormality determination table of the modified example of the seventh mode, (B) is a time saving simplified abnormality determination table of the modified example of the seventh mode, (C) is a jackpot of the modified example of the seventh mode. It is a simple abnormality determination table. It is a flowchart of the input process of the modification of the 7th form. It is a flowchart of the simple abnormality determination processing of the modified example of the seventh mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the main control board of 8th form. (A) is an award ball number counter addition table of the eighth form, (B) is a diagram showing a variation number counter and each storage area of the special memory of the eighth form, (C) is a payout of the eighth form. It is a diagram showing each counter of the special memory for use. It is a flow chart of input processing which a game control microcomputer of the 8th form performs. It is a flow chart of the payout side timer interruption processing of the 8th form. It is a flow chart of input processing which a pay-out control microcomputer of the 8th form performs. It is a perspective view showing the back side of a game machine in the 1st modification of the 8th form. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution by the side of the main control board of the 1st modification of the 8th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit with which the payout control board|substrate of the 1st modification of the 8th form is equipped. (A) is a figure which shows the prize ball number counter addition table of the 2nd modification of an 8th form, (B) shows each storage area of the special memory of the 2nd modification of an 8th form, and a variation|count number counter. It is a figure and (C) is a figure showing each counter of the special payment memory of the 2nd modification of the 8th form. It is a flow chart of the input processing which the game control microcomputer of the 2nd modification of the 8th form performs. It is a flowchart of the input process which the payout control microcomputer of the 2nd modification of the 8th form performs. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of 9th form. It is a flow chart of the game display processing of the ninth form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 9th form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 9th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of 10th form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 10th form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 10th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of 11th form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 11th form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 11th form. It is a figure which shows the drive circuit of the 12th form. It is a figure which shows the switch circuit part of the 12th form. It is a flowchart of the output processing of the 12th form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 12th form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 12th form. It is a figure which shows the game indicator of 13th form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 13th form. It is a flow chart of proportion display processing of the 13th form. It is a flow chart of the output processing of the 14th form. It is a flowchart of the output process of the modification of the 14th form. It is a figure which shows the game display of other modifications. It is a prize ball counter addition table of other modifications. It is a perspective view showing the back side of a game machine of other modifications. It is a figure which shows the state in which the output indicator of other modifications slides. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of power activation of other modifications. It is a figure which shows the RAM for games of other modifications. It is a figure which shows the discharge port sensor of other modifications.

1. Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine according to each embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the following description, the left-right direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as being the same as the left-right direction for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine. Further, the front direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as a direction toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine, and the rear direction of each part of the pachinko gaming machine will be described as a direction away from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 (see FIG. 3) mounted in the gaming machine frame 50. As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine frame 50 constitutes an outer shell portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and includes an outer frame 51, an inner frame 52, and a front frame (glass door frame) 53. The outer frame (base frame portion) 51 is a vertical rectangular frame body that forms the outer shell of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The inner frame (holding frame portion) 52 is a frame body that is arranged inside the outer frame 51 and has a vertically rectangular shape to which the game board 2 is attached. The front frame (front door portion) 53 is arranged on the front side of the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52, and has a vertical rectangular shape that protects the game board 2.

As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine frame 50 includes a hinge portion 54 on the left end side. By this hinge portion 54, the front frame 53 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 51 and the inner frame 52, respectively, and the inner frame 52 is rotatable with respect to the outer frame 51 and the front frame 53, respectively. Has become. An opening 53a is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and a transparent glass plate (window) 55 is attached to the opening 53a so that the player can visually recognize a game area 3 described later.

The inner frame 52 of the gaming machine frame 50 is provided with a frame opening detection switch (frame opening detection means) 50a capable of detecting that the inner frame 52 is opened (rotated) with respect to the outer frame 51. ing. Therefore, when the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51, the frame opening detection switch 50a does not detect the opening of the inner frame 52 (OFF state). On the other hand, when the inner frame 52 is open with respect to the outer frame 51, the frame open detection switch 50a enters a state (ON state) in which the open of the inner frame 52 is detected, and a detection signal is output. In the following, when the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 50 is described, it means the detection of the opening of the inner frame 52.

The frame opening switch (frame opening detecting means) 50a of the present embodiment is a photo switch (photo sensor). However, a switch that detects physical contact with a push button and a spring, a pressure switch (pressure sensor), a proximity switch (proximity sensor), or the like may be used and can be appropriately changed. The frame opening detection means is not limited to the one that detects the opening of the inner frame 52 with respect to the outer frame 51. For example, the opening of the front frame 53 to the inner frame 52 may be detected, and both the opening of the inner frame 52 to the outer frame 51 and the opening of the front frame 53 to the inner frame 52 may be detected. Is also good. The location of the frame opening detection means is not limited to the inner frame 52, but may be the outer frame 51 or the front frame 53, and can be changed as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 1, on the lower right side of the front frame 53, a handle (launching operation means) 60 for launching a game ball with a launching intensity according to a rotation angle is provided. Further, on the lower side of the front frame 53, a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 for storing game balls (game medium), and a surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the hit ball supply plate 61. 62 is provided. Around the ball hitting tray 61, an effect button 63 and a select button (cross key) 64 that can be operated by the player at the time of effect executed as the game progresses are provided. The select button 64 includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button.

Next, the game board 2 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 2 is formed with a rail member 4 which surrounds a game area 3 into which a game ball fired by operating a handle 60 flows down. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board lamp 5 (see FIG. 10) for decoration. The game board 2 includes a plate-shaped member (game board) arranged on the front side and a back unit (a unit for mounting various control boards, an image display device 7, a harness, etc. described later) arranged on the rear side. It is an integrated one.

The game area 3 is provided with a plurality of game nails that change in the direction in which the game balls flow down. An image display device 7, which is a liquid crystal display device, is arranged near the center of the game area 3. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, variable display (variable display) of production symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, 8R synchronized with variable display (variable display) of a first special symbol and a second special symbol described later. There is an effect symbol display area for performing. The effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is referred to as effect symbol variation effect. The effect symbol variation effect may be referred to as “decorative symbol variation effect” or simply “variation effect”.

The effect symbol display area includes, for example, three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area, the middle effect symbol 8C is displayed in the middle symbol display area, and the right effect symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. Each effect symbol is composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers "1" to "9", for example. The image display device 7 is a combination of left, center, and right effect symbols, and a first special symbol displayed on a first special symbol display device 41a and a second special symbol display device 41b (see FIG. 5) described later and The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (that is, the result of the jackpot lottery) is displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect design is stopped and displayed with a doublet such as "777". In addition, when it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a variation such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to understand the progress of the game. That is, the player generally grasps the result of the jackpot lottery on the image display device 7, not on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. In addition, as a mode of variable display of effect symbols, for example, there is a mode of scrolling vertically.

The image display device 7 displays, in addition to the effect design variation effect using the effect design as described above, a big hit effect performed in parallel with the big hit game, a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer (customer waiting effect), and the like. To display. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to effect symbols such as numbers, effect images other than effect symbols such as background images and character images are also displayed.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area for displaying an effect hold image 9A in accordance with the number of first special figure reservations described later, and a number of second special figure reservations described later. There is a second effect hold display area for displaying the effect hold image 9B. Due to the display of the effect holding images 9A and 9B, the number of memories of the first special figure reservation displayed on the later-described first special figure reservation display 43a (see FIG. 5) and the second special figure reservation display 43b (FIG. The number of stored second special figure reservations displayed in (5) can be easily shown to the player.

A center ornament 10 is arranged near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7. At the lower part of the center decoration body 10, a stage portion 11 is formed which can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface to a first starting opening 20 described later. Further, the center decoration 10 is provided with a movable board 15 that is movable in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the initial state, the movable board 15 is in the retracted position where it is almost invisible from the front as shown in FIG. The movable board 15 can be moved from the retracted position to an exposed position (not shown) that hides most of the display screen 7a. The movable plate body 15 is driven by a movable body drive motor 15a (see FIG. 10).

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a first starting opening (also referred to as a first entrance, a first starting winning opening, or a fixed entrance) in which the ease of entering a game ball does not always change. A first start-up winning device (also referred to as a first ball entering means or a fixed ball entering means) 19 including 20 is provided. The winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol (the big hit lottery, that is, the determination and the acquisition of the big hit random numbers and the like).

Further, below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, a normal variable winning device (so-called electric power) having a second starting opening (also called a second entrance, a second starting winning opening, or a variable entrance) 21. (Chew) 22 is provided. The electric ball 22 is also referred to as a variable ball entering means, a second ball entering means, and a second starting prize device. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is a trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol (the big hit lottery). The power tube 22 is an ordinary electric accessory that includes an opening/closing member (movable member) 23 and opens/closes the second starting opening 21 by the operation of the opening/closing member 23. The opening/closing member 23 is driven by an electric power solenoid 24 (see FIG. 9). When the opening/closing member 23 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the second starting opening 21, and when the opening/closing member 23 is in the closing state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 21. In other words, the second starting opening 21 is a starting opening in which the ease of entering the game ball can be changed. In addition, if the electric chute makes it easier to enter the second starting port when the opening/closing member is in the open state than when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the second start is performed in the closed state. It does not have to make it impossible to enter the mouth.

Further, on the right side of the first start opening 20 in the game area 3, a first big winning device (first special winning means or first special variable winning) having a first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. (Also referred to as a device) 31 is provided. The first special winning device 31 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that opens and closes, and a special electric accessory that opens and closes the first special winning opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. Is. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first special winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 9). The first special winning opening 30 can enter the game ball only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state.

Further, above the first special winning opening 30 in the game area 3, a second big winning device (second special winning means or second special variable winning) having a second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. 36). The second special winning device 36 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening/closing member) 37 that opens and closes, and a special electric accessory that opens/closes the second special winning opening 35 by operating the opening/closing member 37. Is. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second special winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 9). The second special winning opening 35 can enter the game ball only when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state.

As shown in FIGS. 4(A) and 4(B), inside the second special winning device 36, a specific area (V area) 39 through which the game balls that have passed through the second special winning opening 35 can pass, and A non-specific area 70 is formed. In addition, in the second special winning device 36, a second special winning opening sensor 35a for detecting a winning of a game ball into the second special winning opening 35 is arranged upstream of the specific area 39 and the non-specific area 70. .. Further, in the specific area 39, a specific area sensor 39a for detecting passage of a game ball to the specific area 39 is arranged. Further, in the non-specific area 70, a non-specific area sensor 70a for detecting passage of a game ball to the non-specific area 70 is arranged. The second big winning device 36 is a distribution member 71 that distributes the game balls that have passed through the second special winning opening 35 to either the specific region 39 or the non-specific region 70, and a distribution member solenoid that drives the distribution member 71. And 73.

FIG. 4A shows the distribution member solenoid 73 when energized. As shown in FIG. 4(A), when the distribution member solenoid 73 is energized, the distribution member 71 is in the first state (passage permitted state) in which the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 is permitted. When the distribution member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the specific area 39 after passing through the second special winning opening sensor 35a. The route of this game ball is called the first route.

FIG. 4B shows the distribution member solenoid 73 when it is not energized. As shown in FIG. 4B, when the distribution member solenoid 73 is not energized, the distribution member 71 is in the second state (passage blocking state) that prevents the game ball from passing to the specific area 39. When the distribution member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35 passes through the second special winning opening sensor 35a and then passes through the non-specific area 70. The route of this game ball is called the second route.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 is a trigger for the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the specific area 39 is a probability variation operating port. On the other hand, the non-specific area 70 is not the probability variation operating port. Further, the first special winning device 31 is not provided with a specific region as a probability variation operating port. That is, only the non-specific area is provided.

Returning to FIG. 3, above the first special winning opening 30 in the game area 3, there is provided a gate 28 (also called a passing opening or a passing area) through which a game ball can pass. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an execution trigger of a normal symbol lottery (that is, acquisition and determination of a normal symbol random number (per random number)) that determines whether or not to open the electric Chu 22. Further, at the lower part of the game area 3, a normal winning opening 27 is provided. Further, at the lowermost part of the game area 3, there is provided an outlet 16 for discharging the game balls that have been hit in the game area 3 but have not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 3.

In this way, in the game area 3 in which various winning openings are arranged, the left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and the right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. There is. The batting method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is referred to as left hitting. On the other hand, the batting method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called right hitting. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing by left-handing is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which the game ball flows down when playing by right-handing. , Second flow path R2.

A first starting opening 20, a normal winning opening 27, and an out opening 16 are provided on the first flow path R1. By hitting the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1, the player can aim for winning at the first starting opening 20 or the normal winning opening 27. The gate 28 is not arranged on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the electric tube 22 is not opened when the player is left-handed.

On the other hand, a second big winning device 36, a gate 28, a first big winning device 31, a power tube 22, and an outlet 16 are provided on the second flow path R2. The player hits the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 to pass through the gate 28 and win the second big winning opening 35, the first big winning opening 30, and the second starting opening 21. Can be aimed at.

A game display 40 is arranged on the right side of the game board 2. The game display 40 displays game information based on the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81 described later. As shown in FIG. 5, the game display device 40 includes a first special symbol display device 41a that variably displays the first special symbol and a second special symbol display device 41b that variably displays the second special symbol. ing. The first special symbol display device 41a is composed of eight gaming light emitting portions (LED elements) LA1 to LA8. The second special symbol display device 41b is composed of eight gaming light emitting portions (LED elements) LA9 to LA16.

Further, the game display device 40, a normal symbol display device 42 for displaying the normal symbols in a variable manner, and a first special symbol reservation display for displaying the number of memories of operation suspension (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display device 41a. Device 43a, the second special symbol hold display device 43b that displays the number of memories of the operation hold (second special symbol hold) of the second special symbol display device 41b, and the operation hold of the normal symbol display device 42 (general figure hold) And a universal figure holding display 44 for displaying the number of memories of the memory. The normal symbol display device 42 is composed of two gaming light emitting portions (LED elements) LA17 and LA18. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a is formed with two game light-emitting parts (LED elements) LA19, LA20. The second special figure reservation indicator 43b is composed of two game light emitting portions (LED elements) LA21, LA22. The universal figure reservation indicator 44 is composed of two gaming light emitting portions (LED elements) LA23 and LA24.

Further, on the game display device 40, a right-handed display device 45 that indicates that the player is in a right-handed state, a game state display device 46 that displays the current game state, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game are displayed. A round indicator 47 and is included. The right-handed indicator 45 is composed of two gaming light emitting portions (LED elements) LA25 and LA26. The gaming state indicator 46 is composed of three gaming light emitting portions (LED elements) LA27 to LA29. The round indicator 47 is composed of three gaming light emitting portions (LED elements) LA30 to LA32. A total of 32 gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA32 in the gaming display 40 are mounted on the gaming LED board 40a.

The variable display of the first special symbol is performed upon the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display device 41. The first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation may be collectively referred to as special figure reservation. Further, the first special figure reservation indicator 43a and the second special figure reservation indicator 43b may be collectively referred to as the special figure reservation indicator 43.

In the special symbol display device 41, the special symbol is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped to display a lottery (special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) based on the winning of the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21. Notify the result. The special symbol that is stopped (stop symbol, a special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a specific special symbol that has been determined in advance (a special symbol of a specific stop mode, that is, a jackpot symbol), in an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (that is, the type of jackpot that was won) A jackpot game (an example of a special game) for opening the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) is performed. The opening pattern of the special winning opening in the jackpot game will be described later.

Specifically, the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b is the first special symbol or the second special symbol depending on the result of the jackpot lottery depending on the light emitting mode of the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16. The design is displayed. For example, when the big hit (one of a plurality of kinds of big hits described later) is won in the lottery of the first special symbol, the gaming light emitting portions LA1, LA2, LA5, LA6 emit light on the first special symbol display 41a. The hit jackpot pattern is displayed (see FIG. 16(A)). If the second special symbol is lost in the lottery, the second special symbol display 41b displays the lost symbol emitted only by the game light emitting section LA15 (see FIG. 16(B)). As a lost symbol, all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display device 41a and all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display device 41b may not emit light. The lost design is not a special special design.

Also, before the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the special symbol is performed for a predetermined variation time, but the mode of the variation display is, for example, the first special symbol. It is a mode that each of the gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 emits light so that the light repeatedly flows on the display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b. The mode of the variable display is that the gaming light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are not displayed in a stopped state (light emitting display in a specific mode), and the gaming light emitting units LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are simultaneously displayed. Anything, such as blinking, can be used.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 (prize), the value of various random numbers such as a jackpot random number acquired for the entering ball (enter The sphere information) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 (see FIG. 9). In detail, if the ball enters the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation storage unit 85a (see FIG. 9) as a first special drawing reservation, and if it is entering the second starting opening 21. For example, it is stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b (see FIG. 9) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 85 is exhausted when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. The digestion of the special figure hold means that the jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the special symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variation display of the special symbol Even if there is a ball hit during the execution or the jackpot game, the jackpot lottery right for the entered ball can be reserved with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. For example, the 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a or the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b, when the number of special figure reservations (1st special figure reservation or 2nd special figure reservation) is “1”, the game of the right side When only the special light emitting portions LA19 and LA21 emit light (light up) and the number of special figure reservations is "2", only the left game light emitting portions LA20 and LA22 emit light to determine the number of special figure reservations. In the case of “3”, the two game light emitting units LA19, LA20, LA21, LA22 are made to blink, and in the case of the number of special figure reservations being “4”, the two game light emitting units LA19, LA20, The LA21 and LA22 are caused to emit light. In addition, in this embodiment, the second special figure reservation is given priority over the first special figure reservation. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol.

The variable display of the normal symbols is triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. In the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol is variably displayed (variable display) and then stopped to notify the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed (ordinary symbol stopped symbol, the ordinary symbol that is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol displayed in a stopped state is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stopping mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), the second starting opening 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Auxiliary game to be performed is performed. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, the normal symbol display device 42 displays the normal symbol corresponding to the result of the normal symbol lottery by the light emitting mode of the game light emitting units LA17, LA18. For example, when the lottery result is a win, the normal winning symbols emitted by the game light emitting units LA17 and LA18 are displayed. If the result of the lottery is a loss, the normal loss pattern emitted only by the lower game light emitting portion LA17 is displayed (see FIG. 16C). A mode in which the gaming light emitting portions LA17 and LA18 are not caused to emit light may be adopted as the normal lost pattern. Note that the normal lost design is not a specific normal design. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time, but the mode of the variable display is, for example, a mode in which the gaming light emitting units LA17, LA18 alternately emit light. It should be noted that the mode of the variable display may be any mode such as flashing all at once unless the game light emitting units LA17, LA18 are stopped (displayed in a specific mode).

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (per random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the universal figure holding storage unit 86 (see FIG. 9). It is temporarily stored as a universal figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of universal figure reservations that can be stored in the universal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four.

The universal figure hold stored in the universal figure hold storage unit 86 is exhausted when the variable display of the ordinary symbols based on the universal figure hold becomes possible. Digesting the universal figure hold means determining a normal symbol random number (random number per hit) corresponding to the universal figure hold and executing a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, if the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the variation display of the ordinary symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

Then, the number of such figure holdings is displayed on the figure holding indicator 44. For example, when the number of public figure reservations is "1", the general figure hold indicator 44 causes only the right game light emitting section LA23 to emit light (lights), and the number of general figure hold is "2". In the case where the left side game light emitting section LA24 is made to emit light, and the number of public figure reservations is "3", the two game light emitting sections LA23 and LA24 are made to blink, and the number of public figure reservations is changed. In the case of "4", the two game light emitting portions LA23, LA24 are caused to emit light.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, a jackpot game can be executed, and the gaming state can be controlled to a high-probability state or a time saving state as described later. When the big hit game is being executed (big hit game state), or in the high-probability state or the time saving state, the right-handed indicator 45 is right because the right-handed player has more privileges than the left-handed player. It is designed to display that it is in a state to be hit. For example, the right-handed indicator 45 causes the two gaming light emitting portions LA25, LA26 to emit light as an indication of a state where the player should right-hand (see FIG. 16D). Note that in the normal gaming state, the left-handed player is more likely to be given more privileges to the left-handed player than the right-handed player. Therefore, the right-handed indicator 45 does not cause the two gaming light emitting units LA25 and LA26 to emit light. It has become.

Further, the current game state is displayed on the game state display 46. For example, in the high probability state, the gaming state indicator 46 causes the two gaming light emitting portions LA27, LA28 to emit light. Further, in the time saving state, the game state indicator 46 causes the game light emitting section LA29 to emit light. Therefore, in the high probability state and the time saving state, the three gaming light emitting units LA27, LA28, LA29 emit light, and in the normal probability state and the time saving state only the gaming light emitting unit LA29 emits light. In the normal game state (normal probability state and non-time saving state), the game state indicator 46 does not cause the three game light emitting portions LA27, LA28, LA29 to emit light (see FIG. 16(D)).

Also, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is displayed on the round display 47. However, in this embodiment, the number of rounds in the jackpot game is set to 16R only (see FIG. 37). Therefore, the round display 47 causes the three gaming light emitting portions LA30, LA31, LA32 to emit light as an indication of the number of rounds (16R) during the execution of the jackpot game (see FIG. 16(D)).

By the way, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is characterized in that it is possible to display the percentage. Proportion (specific percentage value) is the number of prizes (normal electric auditors, special electric auditors) of the total number of prize balls that the player has acquired from the moment the power is turned on (predetermined start time) It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (number of prize-operated prize balls, number of specific game balls) acquired based on operation. However, the proportion includes a character ratio and a continuous character ratio, and the number of character actuation prize balls includes the number of character prize balls and the number of continuous character prize balls. The character ratio is the ratio of the number of award balls (the number of award balls) obtained based on the operation of all the awards, including the ordinary electric prize and the special electric prize, to the total prize balls. The continuous prize ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of continuous prize balls) acquired based on the continuous operation of the special electric auditors, out of the total number of prize balls. That is, the continuous winning character ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained based on only the execution of the jackpot game to the total number of prize balls. Note that the total number of prize balls is a value (denominator measurement value) that is the denominator before calculating the proportion, and the number of accessory action prize balls (number of accessory prize balls, number of consecutive accessory prize balls) is the proportion. Is a value (molecule measurement value) that is the numerator before calculating.

Here, the pachinko game machine is configured such that a test shooting test of a game ball is performed for 10 hours before being installed in a hall. At this time, it is inspected that the accessory ratio does not exceed 70% (70%), and that the continuous accessory ratio does not exceed 60% (60%). That is, it is inspected whether the output rate is within the normal range. If the duty ratio exceeds 70% or the continuous duty ratio exceeds 60%, it means that the pachinko gaming machine can give an excessive privilege to the player. In this way, pachinko game machines that are judged to be within the normal range by inspection are installed in the hall. However, in the past, pachinko game machines that have been modified illegally after being inspected, have a role ratio of more than 70%, or have a continuous role ratio of more than 60% due to failure or malfunction. It could not be completely denied the possibility that it has become.

Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to make it possible to determine whether or not an unauthorized modification has been made, a malfunction or a malfunction has occurred, a ratio display device (specific display device) capable of displaying the ratio. ) 300 is provided. The output indicator (display means) 300 is integrally attached to the rear surface side of the main control board 80, as shown in FIG. The main control board (main board) 80, which will be described in detail later, is a board on which a game control microcomputer 81 capable of executing control processing relating to the progress of the game is mounted. By the control process of the game control microcomputer 81, the output rate display unit 300 displays the output rate (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio). In this way, the proportion display device 300 is arranged on the main control board 80, and the proportion is displayed by the game control microcomputer 81 for the following reason.

The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) is an inspection target for proper operation in a test, unlike a sub-control board 90, which will be described later. That is, it is ensured that the control processing by the game control microcomputer 81 is proper. Therefore, if the gaming control microcomputer 81 displays the proportion, the reliability of the proportion display is high. In short, in order to prevent the display of the proportion itself from being illegally performed, the proportion display device 300 is arranged on the main control board 80, and the gaming control microcomputer 81 is caused to display the proportion. .. As a result, it is possible to make a person who confirms the output rate grasp the output rate as reliable information.

As shown in FIG. 6, the main control board 80 is housed inside the main board case 400. The main board case 400 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so as not to interfere with the visibility of electronic components (such as an integrated circuit) on the main control board 80. The main board case 400 has a structure in which it is divided into two by a rear case 401 arranged on the rear side and a front case 402 on the front side. A connector CN2 is attached above the rear surface of the main control board 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a connector CN1 is attached to the game LED board 40a of the game display 40. Therefore, the connector attached to one end of the harness (not shown) is connected to the connector CN1 of the gaming LED board 40a, and the connector attached to the other end of the harness (not shown) is the connector CN2 of the main control board 80. Connected to. As a result, the game control microcomputer 81 can output a signal based on the control processing to the game display 40 via the harness. As a result, the game display 40 is adapted to display game information by causing each of the game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 to emit light.

As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 80 and the main board case 400 are arranged on the back side of the gaming machine frame 50. Specifically, the main board case 400 accommodating the main control board 80 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit (not shown) of the game board 2 inside the gaming machine frame 50. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the hall and the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (the inner frame 52 is closed with respect to the outer frame 51), the main control board 80 and the proportion indicator 300 It is impossible to see. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (the inner frame 52 is opened with respect to the outer frame 51), the main control board 80 and the ratio indicator 300 are visually recognized through the transparent rear case 401. It is possible to In this way, in order to confirm the proportion displayed on the proportion display device 300, the gaming machine frame 50 is opened and then performed.

As shown in FIG. 8, the proportion indicator 300 is a so-called 4-series 7-segment, and, like the game indicator 40 (see FIG. 5), is provided with a total of 32 lighted (emitted) portions. .. Specifically, the output indicator 300 includes a first lighting region 310, a second lighting region 320, a third lighting region 330, and a fourth lighting region 340 in order from left to right. The four lighting areas (display areas) 310, 320, 330, and 340 are eight lighting sections for output ratio (LED elements) LB1 so that each of them can represent a number from “0” to “9”. -LB8, LB9-LB16, LB17-LB24, LB25-LB32. Since the 4-series 7-segment is a commercial item that is widely distributed in the market, the proportion indicator 300 can be constructed at a low cost by using the 4-series 7-segment.

Next, the display on the ratio display 300 will be described. In the first lighting region 310, a tens digit when displaying the output rate (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio) in percent (percentage) can be displayed. For example, when the proportion is 60%, in the first lighting region 310, the proportion lighting units LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, LB7 are lit, and “6” is displayed (FIG. 26 ( See A)). In the second lighting region 320, a digit of the first place when the output rate is displayed as a percentage (percentage) can be displayed. For example, when the proportion is 60%, in the second lighting region 320, the proportion lighting units LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, LB14 are lit, and "0" is displayed (Fig. 26 ( See B)).

In the third lighting region 330, it is configured to indicate whether the output rate displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 is the character ratio or the continuous character ratio. In the present embodiment, when the accessory ratio is displayed, “1” is displayed in the third lighting area 330. That is, if the proportion lighting units LB18 and LB19 are lit, it means that the character ratio is displayed. On the other hand, when the continuous accessory ratio is displayed, “2” is displayed in the third lighting area 330 (see FIG. 26C). That is, if the proportion lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, LB23 are lit, it means that the continuous accessory ratio is displayed.

The fourth lighting region 340 is configured to indicate whether the output ratio displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 is an effective value or a reference value. Here, the meaning of the valid value or the reference value will be described. As described above, the proportion is the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained based on the operation of the winning character to the total number of prize balls acquired from the time the power is turned on to the present time. If the time during which the game is played by the player is short, the output rate may not have converged. For this reason, a person who confirms the participation rate cannot correctly judge if the participation rate as a value that has converged to some extent is not displayed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first condition that the total number of prize balls acquired from the time the power is turned on to the present time is “10000” (predetermined number of prize balls) or more, or the special condition from the time the power is turned on to the present time If any of the second conditions that the number of fluctuations of the variable display of the symbols is "3000" (predetermined number of rotations) or more is satisfied, the value at which the output rate converges to some extent (effective value) I try to regard it as. On the contrary, if neither the above-mentioned first condition nor the above-mentioned second condition is satisfied, it is considered that the output rate does not converge to some extent (reference value).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the output rate as the effective value is displayed, “1” (specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 (see FIG. 26D). In other words, if the output lighting units LB26 and LB27 are lit, it means that either the first condition or the second condition described above is satisfied. Therefore, if “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, it is possible to correctly determine the output rate as an effective value that has converged to some extent. On the other hand, when displaying the percentage as the reference value, “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340. That is, if the output lighting sections LB25, LB26, LB27, LB28, LB29, and LB30 are lit, none of the above-described first condition or second condition is satisfied. Therefore, if “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, it is possible to confirm the output rate as a reference value that may not have converged yet.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relates to a main control board (game control board) 80 that controls the game profit such as jackpot lottery and transition of the game state, and effects to be executed as the game progresses. It is provided with a sub-control board (production control board) 90 for performing control, a payout control board 110 for performing control regarding payout of game balls, and the like. The main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 respectively correspond to the main boards that can influence the result of the game. The main control board 80 and the payout control board 110 form a main control section, and the sub control board 90 forms a sub control section together with an image control board 100, a sub drive board 107, and a voice control board 106, which will be described later. It should be noted that the sub control unit includes at least a sub control board 90, and is capable of controlling the game effect using effect means (the image display device 7, the speaker 67, the frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the board movable body 15, etc.). Good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a power supply board 150. A power switch 155 is connected to the power board 150, and turning on/off of the power is switched by turning on/off the power switch 155. Note that the power source is 24V AC power supplied from the power source plug 160 to the power source board 150 in a state where the power source plug 160 shown in FIG. 7 is connected to an outlet of a game hall (hall). The power supply board (power-on means) 150 includes an AC-DC converter and a DC-DC converter, and has power (DC37V, DC32V, DC32V, DC32V, etc.) necessary for operating the main control board 80, the sub-control board 90, and the payout control board 110. It is possible to supply electric power (DC 12V, DC 5V, etc.) and to supply necessary electric power to other devices through these substrates.

A backup power supply circuit 151 is provided on the power supply board 150. The backup power supply circuit (backup power supply means) 151 is a RAM 84 and a special memory 89 of a main control board 80, which will be described later, and a sub memory when the power necessary for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not supplied due to power interruption such as business closing or power failure. Power can be supplied to the RAM 94 of the control board 90. Therefore, the information (stored contents) stored in the RAM 84 and the special memory 89 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 are retained even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered off. The RAM (volatile memory) 84 of the main control board 80 and the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 are volatile storage means (DRAM). The backup power supply circuit 151 includes a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. A backup power supply circuit for the RAM 84 and the special memory 89 of the main control board 80 may be provided in the main control board 80, or a backup power supply circuit for the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 may be provided in the sub control board 90.

A RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 for causing the CPU 82 to clear the information stored in the RAM 84 for the main control board 80 is mounted on the power supply board 150. As shown in FIG. 7, the main control board 80 is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and other various control boards including the power supply board 150 are also arranged on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. ing. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 152 and the power switch 155 can be operated only by an employee in a hall that can open the gaming machine frame 50, a person who confirms (inspects) the proportion, or the like. That is, it can be said that the RAM clear switch 152 and the power switch 155 are operating means that cannot be substantially operated by the player. A signal based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 is output from the power supply board 150 to the main control board 80. The location of the RAM clear switch 152 is not limited to the power supply board 150, but may be changed as appropriate, and may be the main control board 80, for example.

As shown in FIG. 9, on the main control board 80, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 81 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer (main control means) 81 has a ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the ROM 83, and a RAM 84 that stores processing information of the CPU 82 as a work memory. An I/O port unit (input/output circuit) 87 for inputting/outputting data and signals, and a special memory 89 used as a work memory for calculating the output rate are included.

As shown in FIG. 9, the RAM 84 is provided with a special figure reservation storage section 85 (first special figure reservation storage section 85a and second special figure reservation storage section 85b) and a general figure reservation storage section 86. Further, in the RAM 84, as shown in FIG. 11B, a first game data storage area, a second game data storage area, and a third game data that store data information for displaying the game information on the game display 40. A storage area and a fourth game data storage area are provided. The ROM 83 may be externally attached.

The special memory (special storage means) 89 is a dedicated memory for storing processing information for calculating the output rate. As shown in FIG. 11C, in the special memory 89, a 100-ball counter, an actual total prize ball number counter, a character prize ball count counter, a continuous character prize ball count counter, and a variation counter. And a character ratio storage area, a continuous character ratio storage area, and a checksum storage area.

The 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of prize balls that the player has acquired, one by one, and resets to a value of "0" when 100 balls are counted (when the number of 100 balls or more is reached). It is supposed to be done. The actual total award ball number counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the 100-ball counter. That is, the actual total prize ball number counter is a counter that increases by one each time the number of prize balls reaches 100. In this way, the 100-ball counter and the actual total prize ball number counter measure the total number of prize balls paid out from the time the power is turned on to the present time as one unit in hundreds (measurement for hundreds of balls). Means).

The prize prize ball number counter counts the total number of prize balls paid out based on the operation of the accessory from the time when the power is turned on to the present time. The continuous prize prize ball number counter measures the total number of prize balls paid out based on only the execution of the jackpot game from the time the power is turned on. The variation counter is for measuring the number of variations in which the variation display of the special symbol is executed from the time the power is turned on to the present time. The character ratio storage area stores the calculated character ratio. The continuous role ratio storage area stores the calculated continuous role ratio. The checksum storage area stores the value of the checksum calculated for the storage content of the special memory 89 as described later.

In the present embodiment, the output ratio display 300 displays the output ratio (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio) as a two-digit integer (for example, "60") that is a percentage (percentage). This is because, if the output rate is displayed using a decimal point such as "0.60", it is necessary to display an integer "0" and a decimal point, and the number of digits to be displayed increases. Also, the reason why the three digits or more is not displayed is that the person who confirms the output rate need not grasp the detailed value of three digits or more.

By the way, when trying to calculate the character ratio as a percentage value, generally, after dividing the number of character prize balls by the total number of prize balls, which is a value measured in units of one ball, 100 times There are possible ways to do it. However, the division process requires a program that confirms whether it is not divided by "0" and whether there is a shift in the digit position, and among the four arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division) This is a heavy load process. Particularly in the case of the above method, the value of the total number of prize balls, which is the denominator, is larger than the value of the number of accessory prize balls, which is the numerator, so that the adjustment of the digit position at the time of division becomes complicated in terms of software. That is, in the software division processing, the subtraction processing is repeatedly performed, and if the value of the denominator is larger than the value of the numerator, the processing becomes complicated by adjusting the digit position.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the total number of prize balls is counted as one in units of 100 balls using the counter for 100 balls and the actual total number of prize balls. Thus, when calculating the character ratio as a percentage value, the value of the actual total prize ball counter (total prize balls is 100 It is decided to divide by one). As a result, the value of the denominator becomes smaller than the value of the numerator, and it is possible to simplify the software processing at the time of division. Furthermore, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, when 100 balls are counted, a 100-ball counter (first counter) that can be reset to a value of “0” and a 100-ball counter that counts 100 balls can be counted as one real counter. A total prize ball number counter (second counter) is used. Therefore, it is possible to perform the calculation processing of the output rate with the value of 2 bytes. That is, a counter used in a normal pachinko gaming machine can count a 2-byte value (value from 0 to 65535). However, if you try to count the total number of prize balls in units of one ball using only one counter, the total number of prize balls exceeds 65535 balls as the game progresses, and it can be treated as a 2-byte value. Disappear. Therefore, by using two counters, that is, a counter for 100 balls and a counter for actual total prize balls, it is possible to substantially count the total prize balls up to 100 times 6553500. As a result, it is possible to handle the 2-byte value as it is when calculating the output rate. In this way, it is possible to calculate the output rate in a unit (2 bytes) that is easy for the game control microcomputer 81 to handle, and it is possible to prevent the calculation process from becoming complicated.

In the above description, when calculating the character ratio, the value of the character prize ball counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball counter, but when calculating the continuous character ratio, Is only to divide the value of the number of consecutive winning prize balls by the value of the actual total prize ball number counter. Therefore, the same effects as the effects described above can be obtained, and the same description will be omitted. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the calculated accessory ratio as a percentage value in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89, and stores the calculated continuous accessory ratio as a percentage value in the continuous accessory ratio memory of the special memory 89. It is designed to be stored in the area.

Here, in this embodiment, unlike the information stored in the RAM 84, the information stored in the special memory 89 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on. That is, the information stored in the special memory 89 is basically not erased after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time. Therefore, the output rate (characteristics ratio or continuous character ratio) calculated in the present embodiment is the number of prize balls actuated in the total number of prize balls from the moment the power is first turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It means the ratio of the number of prize balls (the number of prize prize balls, the number of consecutive prize prize balls). The reason why the special memory 89 is provided separately from the existing RAM 84 so that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are not erased is as follows.

As described above, by the time the ratio reaches a value that has converged to some extent (effective value), the game is sufficiently played by the player, and the total prize balls number and the accessory working prize balls amount to large values. Need to be However, for example, even if one day has passed, it is possible that the number of fluctuations is less than 3000 revolutions and the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000. In this case, the information (total number of prize balls, number of prize prize balls, number of continuous prize prize balls, number of fluctuations, etc.) for calculating the percentage is temporarily operated by operating the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on the next day. If it is cleared, there is a possibility that the rate of exit as an effective value cannot be calculated forever. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored content of the special memory 89 is not erased, so that the output rate as an effective value can be calculated. In particular, since the information stored in the special memory 89 is basically not erased, the longer the game period is, for example, one month or longer, the more converged the value is. It is possible to calculate.

The special memory 89 of the present embodiment is a volatile storage means (DRAM) that cannot hold the stored contents when power is cut off. However, as described above, power (backup power supply) can be supplied from the backup power supply circuit 151 of the power supply board 150 to the special memory 89 when power is cut off due to business closure or power failure. Therefore, if the power is cut off for several days, the contents stored in the special memory 89 are not erased.

Returning to the description of the electrical configuration on the main control board 80 side shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, a drive circuit 200 is provided on the main control board 80. The drive circuit 200 is a circuit for displaying the game information on the game display 40 based on the signal (data information) output from the game control microcomputer 81, and the proportion display 300 Is a circuit for displaying. The configuration of the drive circuit 200 will be described later in detail.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, a signal is input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and a signal is output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the sensors include a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first big winning opening sensor 30a, a second big winning opening sensor 35a, a specific area sensor 39a, and a non-specification. The area sensor 70a and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are connected. Further, the frame opening detection switch 50a is connected to the main control board 80, and the detection signal from the frame opening detection switch 50a can be input to the game control microcomputer 81.

The first starting opening sensor 20a is provided in the first starting opening 20 and detects a game ball that has won the first starting opening 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided in the second starting port 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second starting port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35. The specific area sensor 39a is provided in the specific area 39 inside the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the specific area 39. The non-specific area sensor 70a is provided in the non-specific area 70 in the second special winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-specific area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided in each of the normal winning openings 27 and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27.

Further, as solenoids, an electric power solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a distribution member solenoid 73 are connected. The power cable solenoid 24 drives the opening/closing member 23 of the power cable 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. The distribution member solenoid 73 drives the distribution member 71 of the second special winning device 36.

Further, on the main control board 80, the game display 40 (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b, ordinary symbol display 42, first special symbol reservation display 43a, second special symbol reservation display The device 43b, the universal figure reservation display 44, the right hitting display 45, the game state display 46, and the round display 47) are connected. Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring.

On the payout control board 110, a prize ball payout device 120, a ball rental payout device 130, and a card unit 135 (which is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and can lend a ball based on information of a prepaid card or the like inserted therein) (Not shown) is connected, and the launch device 112 is also connected via the launch control circuit 111. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (see FIG. 1). Note that, as shown in FIG. 7, the payout control board 110 is disposed below the main control board 80 and is surrounded by a payout board case 500 made of transparent synthetic resin.

The payout control board (main board) 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “payout control microcomputer”) 116 capable of executing control processing related to payout of game balls according to a program. The payout control microcomputer (payout control means) 116 has a ROM 118 storing a program for controlling payout, a RAM 119 used as a work memory, a CPU 117 for executing the program stored in the ROM 118, and input/output of data and signals. An I/O port unit (input/output circuit) 109 for performing the above is included. The ROM 118 may be externally attached.

The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal (prize ball command) from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting, and a detection signal from the prize ball sensor 122 is output to the payout control board 110. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls due to winning in the normal winning opening 27 is eight. Further, the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting port 20 is 3 and the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting port 21 is 7. Then, the number of prize balls obtained by winning the first major winning opening 30 is 15 and the number of prize balls winning by the second major winning opening 35 is 15 (see FIG. 11A). Note that the number of prize balls to be won in each prize hole is not limited to the above number and can be changed as appropriate.

Further, the payout control microcomputer 116 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 to pay out the ball. The balls to be paid out are detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting, and a detection signal from the ball lending sensor 132 is output to the payout control board 110. When the player operates the handle 60 (see FIG. 1) of the firing device 112, the touch switch 114 detects contact with the handle 60 and the firing volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60. .. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with the strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, one game ball is shot in about 0.6 seconds.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only signals can be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed as a communication direction restricting means.

As shown in FIG. 10, on the sub control board 90, a one-chip microcomputer for effect control (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 91 for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. In the effect control microcomputer (effect control means) 91, a ROM 93 storing a program for controlling the effect along with the progress of the game, a RAM 94 used as a work memory, and a CPU 92 executing the program stored in the ROM 93. , An I/O port unit (input/output circuit) 97 for inputting/outputting data and signals. The ROM 93 may be externally attached.

An image control board 100, a sound control board 106, and a sub drive board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub control board 90 causes the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 to control the image display device 7 based on the command received from the main control board 80.

The image control board 100 includes a ROM 103 that stores a program for controlling image display and the like, a RAM 104 that is used as a work memory, and a CPU 102 that executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The ROM 103 stores still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7, specifically, image data such as characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols (including effect patterns) and background images. Is stored.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the speaker 67 to output sound, music, sound effects, etc. through the sound control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may be caused to execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, based on the command received from the main control board 80, via the sub-driving board 107 and the relay board 108, the frame lamp 66 (light emitting means provided in the gaming machine frame 50) and the board. Lighting control of lamps such as the lamp 5 is performed. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting/extinguishment, light emission color, etc., lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of each lamp (LED element), and according to each light emission pattern data. It controls the light emission of the lamp (LED element). Note that the data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs drive control of the movable board 15 via the sub drive board 107 and the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (also referred to as drive data) that determines the operation mode of the movable board 15, and controls the driving of the movable body drive motor 15a according to the operation pattern data. The data stored in the ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the operation pattern data.

The sub-control board 90 is also connected to a production button detection switch (SW) 63a and a select button detection switch 64a. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a detection signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90. The select button detection switch 64a detects that the select button 64 (see FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the select button 64 is pressed, the select button detection switch 64a outputs a detection signal to the sub control board 90.

9 and 10 are functional block diagrams for explaining the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the last, and not only the boards shown in FIGS. 9 and 10 are provided. Except for the main control board 80, any of the plurality of boards shown in FIG. 9 or 10 may be configured as one board, or one board illustrated in FIG. 9 or 10 may be configured as a plurality of boards. good.

3. Connection state between the game display 40 and the ratio display 300 and the game control microcomputer 81 Next, regarding the connection between the game display 40 and the ratio display 300 and the game control microcomputer 81, FIGS. It will be explained based on. Therefore, first, based on FIG. 12, an electrical connection state of each of the gaming light emitting portions (light emitting portions) LA1 to LA32 of the gaming display 40 will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, the connector CN1 provided in the game display 40 is provided with 12 pins.

The first common signal line A1, the second common signal line A2, the third common signal line A3, and the fourth common signal line A4 are connected to pins 1 to 4 of the connector CN1. From the 5th pin to the 12th pin of the connector CN1, the first data signal line Aa, the second data signal line Ab, the third data signal line Ac, the fourth data signal line Ad, the fifth data signal line Ae, the The sixth data signal line Af, the seventh data signal line Ag, and the eighth data signal line Ah are connected to each other.

In the following, the area in which the gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display 41a are provided will be referred to as a "first light emitting area 410". Moreover, the area|region where each game light-emitting part LA9-LA16 of the 2nd special symbol display 41b is provided is called "the 2nd light-emitting area 420." In addition, each game light emitting section LA17, LA18 of the normal symbol display 42, each game light emitting section LA19 to LA22 of the special figure reservation display 43, and each game light emitting section LA23, LA24 of the general figure reservation display 44. The region where and are provided will be referred to as a "third light emitting region 430". In addition, the gaming light emitting portions LA25 and LA26 of the right-handed indicator 45, the gaming light emitting portions LA27 to LA29 of the gaming state indicator 46, and the gaming light emitting portions LA30 to LA32 of the round display 47 are provided. The area provided is referred to as a “fourth light emitting area 440”.

The first common signal line A1 is connected to the gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting area 410. The second common signal line A2 is connected to the gaming light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting area 420. The third common signal line A3 is connected to the gaming light emitting portions LA17 to LA24 in the third light emitting area 430. The fourth common signal line A4 is connected to the gaming light emitting portions LA25 to LA32 in the fourth light emitting region 440. The eight data signal lines Aa to Ah from the first data signal line Aa to the eighth data signal line Ah are the eight gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting area 410 and the second light emitting area. Eight 420 light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 for 420, eight game light emitting portions LA17 to LA24 for the third light emitting area 430, and eight game light emitting portions LA25 to LA32 for the fourth light emitting area 440, respectively. linked.

By the connection described above, the game control microcomputer 81 will perform dynamic lighting control for the 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32. That is, if one signal line (32 in total) is connected to each of the 32 game light emitting units LA1 to LA32 and static lighting control is performed, the number of signal lines becomes too large. The game control microcomputer 81, which is an 8-bit microcomputer, cannot control lighting. Therefore, the number of signal lines is reduced by connecting the common signal lines A1, A2, A3, A4 to each of the light emitting areas 410, 420, 430, 440 having eight game light emitting portions. .. Then, in the present embodiment, the light emitting regions capable of emitting light among the four light emitting regions 410, 420, 430, 440 are sequentially switched every 4 ms. Thus, by utilizing the afterimage phenomenon, it is possible for the human eye to appear as if the four light emitting regions 410, 420, 430, and 440 are simultaneously emitting light.

The outline of the dynamic lighting control will be described. For example, all of the 32 game light emitting portions LA1 to LA32 are made to appear to be emitting light. In this case, first, the voltage of the first common signal line A1 is set to "H" level (voltage higher than the upper limit threshold voltage), and the voltages of the other common signal lines A2, A3, A4 are set to "L" level (lower limit). Voltage lower than the threshold voltage). Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa-Ah is set to the “H” level. As a result, a driving current flows through all the gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting area 410, and the gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 emit light. Then, 4 ms later, the voltage of the second common signal line A2 is set to "H" level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A3, A4 are set to "L" level. Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa-Ah is set to the “H” level. As a result, a driving current flows through all the gaming light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting area 420, and the gaming light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 emit light.

Then, 4 ms later, the voltage of the third common signal line A3 is set to "H" level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A2, A4 are set to "L" level. Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa-Ah is set to the “H” level. As a result, a drive current flows through all the gaming light emitting portions LA17 to LA24 in the third light emitting area 430, and the gaming light emitting portions LA17 to LA24 emit light. Then, 4 ms later, the voltage of the fourth common signal line A4 is set to "H" level, and the voltages of the other common signal lines A1, A2, A3 are set to "L" level. Then, the voltage of each data signal line Aa-Ah is set to the “H” level. As a result, a drive current flows through all the gaming light emitting portions LA25 to LA32 in the fourth light emitting area 440, and the gaming light emitting portions LA25 to LA32 emit light. Thereafter, similarly, the light emission from the first light emitting region 410 to the fourth light emitting region 440 is repeated every 4 ms. Thus, at a certain moment, the gaming light emitting portion emits light only in any one of the four light emitting areas 410 to 440, but to the human eye, all the light emitting areas 410 to 440 are in the light emitting areas. The gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA32 are seen to emit light.

Next, based on FIG. 13, an electrical connection state of each of the proportion lighting units (lighting units) LB1 to LB32 of the proportion display device 300 will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, the output ratio indicator 300 includes a first common signal line B1, a second common signal line B2, a third common signal line B3, a fourth common signal line B4, a first data signal line Ba, The second data signal line Bb, the third data signal line Bc, the fourth data signal line Bd, the fifth data signal line Be, the sixth data signal line Bf, the seventh data signal line Bg, and the eighth data signal line Bh are connected. ing. These signal lines B1 to B4 and Ba to Bh are provided on the main control board 80.

Specifically, the first common signal line B1 is connected to the output ratio lighting units LB1 to LB8 in the first lighting region 310. The second common signal line B2 is connected to the output lighting units LB9 to LB16 in the second lighting region 320. The third common signal line B3 is connected to the output lighting units LB17 to LB24 in the third lighting region 330. The fourth common signal line B4 is connected to the output lighting units LB25 to LB32 in the fourth lighting region 340. Then, the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh from the first data signal line Ba to the eighth data signal line Bh include the eight lighting units LB1 to LB8 in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting. Eight proportion lighting parts LB9 to LB16 in the area 320, eight proportion lighting parts LB17 to LB24 in the third lighting area 330, and eight proportion lighting parts LB25 in the fourth lighting area 340. ~ Each is connected to LB32.

By the connection described above, the game control microcomputer 81 will perform dynamic lighting control for the 32 output ratio lighting sections LB1 to LB32. The dynamic lighting control for the proportion lighting units LB1 to LB32 is the same as the dynamic lighting control for the gaming light emitting units LA1 to LA32 described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

Next, the electrical connection state of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 14, the game control microcomputer 81 has 8-bit input/output terminals D0 to D7, an output terminal PO11, an output terminal PO12, an output terminal PO13, and many other terminals (for example, a backup power supply). Terminal VBB terminal). The input/output terminals D0 to D7 of the game control microcomputer 81 are connected to the bus line BL, and data information D[0], D[1], D[2], D[3], D[4], D[5], D[6], D[7] can be input/output respectively. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 can output 8-bit data information D[0] to D[7] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 to the bus line BL.

Hereinafter, the data information D[0] to D[7] will be referred to as data information D[0...7], and the data information D[0] to D[3] will be referred to as data information D[0...3]. And Then, for example, the parentheses of the data information D[0] will be omitted, and the data information will be simply referred to as the data information D0. Further, in the present embodiment, the data information D0="1" means that the "H" level signal (data information D0) is output, and the data information D0="0" means the "L" level signal. (Data information D0) is output.

The game control microcomputer 81 can output the select signal XCSE0 from the output terminal PO11, can output the select signal XCSE1 from the output terminal PO12, and can output the select signal XCSE10 from the output terminal PO13. The level of the output select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, XCSE10 is either “H” level (voltage higher than upper limit threshold voltage) or “L” level (voltage lower than lower limit threshold voltage) by the game control microcomputer 81. It is set to crab.

Next, based on FIG. 15, an electrical connection state of the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment (first embodiment) will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, the drive circuit 200 includes a light emission selection circuit unit 210 and a light emission drive circuit unit 220 in order to display game information on the game display 40. The drive circuit 200 of this embodiment is characterized in that it has a lighting selection circuit section 230 in order to display the output ratio on the output ratio display 300.

The light emission selection circuit unit 210 is a circuit for selecting a light emission region that can emit light among the four light emission regions 410 to 440 included in the game display 40, based on the data information D[0... 3]. The light emission selection circuit unit 210 includes a flip-flop (IC1) and a transistor array (IC2).

The IC 1 includes 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. The bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 4D of the IC1 so that the data information D0, D1, D2 and D3 are input respectively. Further, the input terminals 5D to 8D of the IC1 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, four signal transmission lines S1 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1, respectively. The output terminals 5Q to 8Q of IC1 are not connected. The reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC1. The select signal XCSE0 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC1.

This IC1 is a D-type flip-flop, which holds (latches) the data information D[0...3] input from the input terminals 1D to 4D at the rising edge of the select signal XCSE0 and holds the data. The information D[0...3] is output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q. A general-purpose IC such as "SN74HC273N" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used as the IC1.

The IC2 is a driver capable of driving a large current with a minute input current, and has 8-bit input terminals IN1 to IN8, 8-bit output terminals O1 to O8, and other terminals (Vs terminal, GND terminal). I have it. Four signal transmission lines S1 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC2. Further, the input terminals IN5 to IN8 of the IC2 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC2 have a first common signal line (first light emitting common line) A1, a second common signal line (second light emitting common line) A2, and a third common signal line A3. The fourth common signal line A4 is connected. These common signal lines A1 to A4 are connected to the first pin to the fourth pin of the connector CN2 and serve as the same transmission path as the common signal lines A1 to A4 (see FIG. 12) of the game display 40 described above. The output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC2 are unconnected. A general-purpose IC such as “M54562WP” manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used as the IC2.

The light emission drive circuit unit 220 emits eight gaming light emission units in the light emission region selected by the light emission selection circuit unit 210 among the four light emission regions 410 to 440 based on the data information D[0... 7]. It is a circuit to enable. The light emission drive circuit unit 220 includes a flip-flop (IC3) and a transistor array (IC4).

The IC 3 includes 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal, GND terminal). ing. The bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of the IC3 so that the data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7 is input respectively. On the other hand, eight signal transmission lines S2 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 8Q of the IC3, respectively. The reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC3. The select signal XCSE1 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC3.

This IC3 is a D-type flip-flop, which holds (latches) the data information D[0...7] input from the input terminals 1D to 8D at the rising edge of the select signal XCSE1 and holds the data. Information D[0...7] is output from the output terminals 1Q to 8Q. A general-purpose IC such as "SN74HC273N" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used as the IC3.

The IC4 is a driver capable of driving a large current with a minute input current, and has input terminals IN1 to IN8 for 8 bits, output terminals O1 to O8 for 8 bits, and other terminals (COM terminal, GND terminal). I have it. Eight signal transmission lines S2 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN8 of the IC4. On the other hand, the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC 4 are connected to the respective data signal lines Aa to Ah from the first data signal line Aa to the eighth data signal line Ah. These data signal lines Aa to Ah are connected to the 5th to 12th pins of the connector CN2 via the current limiting resistor RR, and are connected to the above-mentioned data signal lines Aa to Ah (see FIG. 12) of the game display 40. Same transmission line. A general-purpose IC such as "M54585WP" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used as the IC4.

The lighting selection circuit unit 230 is a circuit for selecting a lighting area that can be turned on among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 included in the output ratio indicator 300, based on the data information D[0... 3]. The lighting selection circuit unit 230 includes a flip-flop (IC5) and a transistor array (IC6).

The IC 5 includes 8-bit input terminals 1D to 8D, 8-bit output terminals 1Q to 8Q, a clock input terminal CLK, a clear input terminal CLR, and other terminals (VCC terminal and GND terminal). ing. The bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 4D of the IC5 so that the data information D0, D1, D2 and D3 are input respectively. The input terminals 5D to 8D of the IC 5 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, four signal transmission lines S3 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC 5, respectively. Moreover, the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC 5 are not connected. The reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC5. The select signal XCSE10 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC5.

The IC 5 is a D-type flip-flop, which holds (latches) the data information D[0...3] input from the input terminals 1D to 4D at the rising edge of the select signal XCSE10 and holds the data. The information D[0...3] is output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q. A general-purpose IC such as "SN74HC273N" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used as the IC5.

The IC 6 is a driver that can drive a large current with a minute input current, and has input terminals IN1 to IN8 for 8 bits, output terminals O1 to O8 for 8 bits, and other terminals (Vs terminal, GND terminal). I have it. Four signal transmission lines S3 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC6. Further, the input terminals IN5 to IN8 of the IC6 are connected to the ground. On the other hand, the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC 6 have a first common signal line (first lighting common line) B1, a second common signal line (second lighting common line) B2, and a third common signal line B3. The fourth common signal line B4 is connected. These common signal lines B1 to B4 are the same transmission paths as the common signal lines B1 to B4 (see FIG. 13) of the output ratio indicator 300 described above. The output terminals O5 to O8 of IC6 are not connected. For the IC 6, a general-purpose IC such as "M54562WP" manufactured by Texas Instruments can be preferably used.

In this embodiment, the data signal lines (branch data lines) Ba to Bh are provided so as to branch from the eight data signal lines (data lines) Aa to Ah arranged between the IC 4 and the connector CN2. ing. These data signal lines Ba to Bh serve as the same transmission paths as the data signal lines Ba to Bh (see FIG. 13) of the output ratio indicator 300 described above. In this way, the signals output from the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC4 can be transmitted to the gaming display 40 via the data signal lines Aa to Ah, and can also be transmitted to the proportion display 300 via the data signal lines Ba to Bh. Has become.

4. Dynamic Lighting Control by Game Control Microcomputer 81 Next, dynamic lighting control by the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 34. Therefore, first, based on FIGS. 16 to 25, a case where dynamic lighting control is performed on the game display 40 will be described. Here, as an example, as shown in FIG. 16(A), the game light emitting portions LA1, LA2, LA5, LA6 are caused to emit light in the first light emitting region 410. That is, the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 41a. Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, the game light emitting section LA15 is caused to emit light in the second light emitting region 420. That is, the lost symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display device 41b. Next, as shown in FIG. 16C, the game light emitting portions LA17, LA20 are caused to emit light in the third light emitting region 430. That is, the normal symbol display is displayed on the normal symbol display 42, and the first special symbol reservation display 43a indicates that the first special symbol reservation is one. Next, as shown in FIG. 16D, the gaming light emitting portions LA25, LA26, LA30, LA31, LA32 are caused to emit light in the fourth light emitting region 440. That is, the right-handed indicator 45 indicates that the player should be right-handed, and the round indicator 47 indicates that the number of rounds is 16R.

Note that FIG. 17 shows a case where the light emitting state of each game light emitting unit is once cleared. This does not reflect the light emitting state of each gaming light emitting unit that was illuminated in the previous (4 ms before) light emitting region when each gaming light emitting unit in a certain light emitting region of the game display 40 emits light. This is because In this case, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00000000], as shown in FIG. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 3 holds the data information D[00000000], and the voltage of all eight signal transmission lines S2 becomes “L” level. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltages of all eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to the “L” level, and does not pass the drive current to the eight game light emitting units. In this way, the light emitting state of each gaming light emitting section is cleared. In the case of once clearing the lighting state of each of the proportion lighting units, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 is also the same, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the above-described example, when the game control microcomputer 81 sets the first light emitting region 410 as a light emitting region that can emit light among the four light emitting regions 410 to 440, it emits light in the fourth light emitting region 440 of the previous time (4 ms ago). First, the light emitting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the state. Next, as shown in FIG. 18, data information D[0...3]=D[1000] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC1 holds the data information D[1000], and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [HLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [HLLL]. In this way, the first light emitting region 410 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 19, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[11001100]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 3 holds the data information D[11001100], and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 sequentially become [HHLLHHLL] from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltage of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HHLLHHLL] and passes the drive current. In this way, the game light emitting portions LA1, LA2, LA5, LA6 emit light in the first light emitting region 410 (see FIG. 16A).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the light emitting area, which can emit light, among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 as the second light emitting area 420. In this case, first, the light emitting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emitting state in the first light emitting region 410 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 20, data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC1 holds the data information D[0100], and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LHLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LHLL]. In this way, the second light emitting region 420 is selected.

Then, as shown in FIG. 21, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[00001000]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 3 holds the data information D [00001000], and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [LLLLHLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltage of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [LLLLHLLLL] and passes the drive current. In this way, the game light emitting section LA15 emits light in the second light emitting area 420 (see FIG. 16B).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the light emitting area that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 to the third light emitting area 430. In this case, the light emitting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emitting state in the second light emitting region 420 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 22, data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 1 holds the data information D[0010], and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LLHL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LLHL]. In this way, the third light emitting region 430 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 23, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[10010000]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 3 holds the data information D [10010000], and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 sequentially become [HLLHLLLL] from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltage of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HLLHLLLL] and supplies a drive current. In this way, the game light emitting portions LA17, LA20 emit light in the third light emitting region 430 (see FIG. 16C).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the fourth light emitting region 440 as a light emitting region that can emit light among the four light emitting regions 410 to 440. In this case, first, the light emitting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the light emitting state in the third light emitting region 430 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 24, data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC1 holds the data information D[0001], and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S1 become [LLLH] in order from the top. As a result, the IC2 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines A1 to A4 to [LLLH]. In this way, the fourth light emitting region 440 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 25, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[110011111]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 3 holds the data information D[11000111], and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHLLLLHHH] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltage of the eight data signal lines Aa to Ah to [HHLLLLHHH] and supplies a drive current. In this way, the game light emitting portions LA25, LA26, LA30, LA31, LA32 emit light in the fourth light emitting area 440 (see FIG. 16D). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81, every 4 ms, as described above, the emission control in the first emission region 410, the emission control in the second emission region 420, the emission control in the third emission region 430, the fourth emission. The light emission control in the area 440 is repeated.

Next, a case where the dynamic lighting control is performed on the output ratio indicator 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 34. Here, as an example, as shown in FIG. 26A, in the first lighting region 310, the lighting units LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, and LB7 for output ratio are lit. That is, “6” is displayed in the first lighting area 310. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(B), the output lighting units LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, LB14 are lit in the second lighting region 320. That is, “0” is displayed in the second lighting area 320. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(C), the output lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, LB23 are lit in the third lighting region 330. That is, “2” is displayed in the third lighting area 330. Next, as shown in FIG. 26(D), the proportion lighting units LB26 and LB27 are lit in the fourth lighting region 340. That is, “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340.

In the above-described example, when the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the lighting region that can be lighted among the four lighting regions 310 to 340 to the first lighting region 310, the lighting in the fourth lighting region 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is performed. First, the lighting state is cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so that the state is not reflected. Next, as shown in FIG. 27, data information D[0...3]=D[1000] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 5 holds the data information D[1000], and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [HLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [HLLL]. In this way, the first lighting region 310 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 28, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[10111110]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 3 holds the data information D[10111110], and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HLHHHHHL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltage of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HLHHHHHL] and supplies a drive current. In this way, in the 1st lighting area|region 310, the lighting parts LB1, LB3, LB4, LB5, LB6, and LB7 are lighted (refer FIG. 26(A)).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a lighting region that can be lighted among the four lighting regions 310 to 340 as the second lighting region 320. In this case, the lighting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 29, data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 5 holds the data information D[0100], and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LHLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LHLL]. In this way, the second lighting region 320 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 30, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[11111100]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 3 holds the data information D[11111100], and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [HHHHHHLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltage of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HHHHHHLL], and passes the drive current. In this way, in the second lighting region 320, the lighting units for output LB9, LB10, LB11, LB12, LB13, LB14 are lit (see FIG. 26(B)).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a lighting region that can be lighted among the four lighting regions 310 to 340 as the third lighting region 330. In this case, the lighting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so that the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, as shown in FIG. 31, data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 5 holds the data information D[0010], and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LLHL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LLHL]. In this way, the third lighting region 330 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 32, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[11011010]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 3 holds the data information D[11011010], and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 sequentially become [HHLHHLHL] from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltage of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [HHLHHLHL], and supplies a drive current. In this way, in the 3rd lighting area 330, the lighting parts LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, and LB23 for ratio lights up (refer FIG.26(C)).

After that (after 4 ms), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a lighting region that can be lighted among the four lighting regions 310 to 340 to the fourth lighting region 340. In this case, the lighting state is first cleared as shown in FIG. 17 so as not to reflect the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 of the previous time (4 ms before). Next, as shown in FIG. 33, data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 5 holds the data information D[0001], and the voltages of the four signal transmission lines S3 become [LLLH] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 6 switches the voltages of the four common signal lines B1 to B4 to [LLLH]. In this way, the fourth lighting region 340 is selected.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0-7]=D[01100000]. Then, the level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level. As a result, the IC 3 holds the data information D[01100000], and the voltages of the eight signal transmission lines S2 become [LHHLLLLLL] in order from the top. As a result, the IC 4 switches the voltage of the eight data signal lines Ba to Bh to [LHHLLLLLL] and passes the drive current. In this way, in the 4th lighting area 340, the lighting parts LB26 and LB27 for ratio lights up (refer FIG.26(D)). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81, every 4 ms, as described above, lighting control in the first lighting region 310, lighting control in the second lighting region 320, lighting control in the third lighting region 330, fourth lighting. The lighting control in the area 340 is repeated.

5. Technical Meaning of Drive Circuit 200 Next, the technical meaning of the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the present embodiment will be described. Therefore, description will be made while comparing with the first comparative example and the second comparative example. As a first comparative example, a drive circuit 200X as shown in FIG. 35 can be considered. The drive circuit 200X is a lighting circuit that selects a lighting region that can be lighted from the four lighting regions 310 to 340 of the output ratio indicator 300, in addition to the existing circuits of the light emission selection circuit unit 210 and the light emission driving circuit unit 220 described above. It includes a selection circuit unit 210X and a lighting drive circuit unit 220X that enables lighting of each of the eight emission ratio lighting units in the selected lighting region.

The lighting selection circuit unit 210X has the same configuration as the light emission selection circuit unit 210, and includes a flip-flop (IC1X) and a transistor array (ICX2). The lighting drive circuit unit 220X has the same configuration as the light emission drive circuit unit 220 and includes a flip-flop (IC3X) and a transistor array (IC4X). The connection between the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting drive circuit unit 220X and the output ratio indicator 300 is exactly the same as the connection between the light emission selection circuit unit 210 and the light emission drive circuit unit 220 and the game display 40. .. Therefore, in the drive circuit 200X of the first comparative example, four ICs are newly added to the existing four ICs (integrated circuits) for causing the game display 40 to emit light.

By the way, the main control board 80 has large technical restrictions, and each manufacturer designs the main control board 80 so as to exhibit the maximum performance within the technical restrictions. Therefore, the main control board 80 does not have enough space for newly arranging the proportion indicator 300 and its drive circuit. Therefore, it is conceivable to use a main control board larger than the existing main control board 80, but a design change due to the size of the main control board or the like also affects the design of other control boards, resulting in a huge cost. It will cost you. Therefore, it is realistic to bring the parts on the existing main control board 80 close together to create a space. However, if the parts are too close together, then they become vulnerable to noise. In other words, if the parts of the main control board are too close together, the ground will be reduced and the design will be weak against noise. From the above viewpoints, it is desirable that the number of new components to be arranged on the main control board 80 be as small as possible.

Therefore, according to the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, two ICs (lighting selection circuit unit) are provided to four existing ICs (integrated circuits) for causing the game display 40 to emit light. 230) is added. That is, by connecting the data signal lines Ba to Bh branched from the data signal lines Aa to Ah to the output ratio indicator 300, the lighting drive circuit unit 220X (see FIG. 35) as in the first comparative example is omitted. There is. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of additional ICs as compared with the drive circuit 200X of the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, and it is possible to facilitate mounting on the main control board 80 from the viewpoint of arrangement space. .. Then, it is possible to prevent the respective components on the main control board 80 from becoming too close to each other and to prevent the design from being susceptible to noise as much as possible.

As a second comparative example, it is possible to perform dynamic lighting control as shown in FIG. That is, in the second comparative example, first, as shown in FIG. 36A, the light emission control in the first light emitting region 410 of the game display 40 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36B, light emission control in the second light emitting region 420 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36C, light emission control in the third light emitting region 430 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36D, light emission control in the fourth light emitting region 440 is performed. Subsequently, after 4 ms, as shown in FIG. 36(E), the lighting control in the first lighting region 310 of the output indicator 300 is performed. Subsequently, 4 ms later, as shown in FIG. 36(F), lighting control in the second lighting region 320 is performed. Then, 4 ms later, as shown in FIG. 36(G), the lighting control in the third lighting region 330 is performed. Then, 4 ms later, as shown in FIG. 36(H), lighting control in the fourth lighting region 340 is performed. Thereafter, similarly, the dynamic lighting control shown in FIGS. 36(A) to (H) is repeated. Therefore, in the second comparative example, focusing on a certain light emitting region or lighting region, the light emission control or the lighting control is performed at a cycle of 32 ms.

However, in the dynamic lighting control of the second comparative example, the cycle of the light emission control (lighting control) is long, and the display on the game display 40 and the display on the proportion display 300 may be blinking. That is, in spite of the situation in which the gaming display 40 shows the state of continuing to emit light, in spite of the situation in which the game display 40 appears to be blinking or the proportion display 300 shows the state of continuing to light up, It might look like it was blinking.

Therefore, according to the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment, the light emission control or the light emission control is performed at a cycle of 16 ms in a certain light emission region or a light emission region. That is, the light emission control in the light emission areas 410 to 440 of the game display 40 and the light emission control in the light emission areas 310 to 340 of the output rate display 300 are selectively executed, and the same cycle as the conventional one 16 ms), the dynamic lighting control is enabled. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the display on the game display 40 and the display on the proportion display 300 from blinking. In short, the technical significance of the drive circuit 200 of the present embodiment is to be mounted on the main control board 80 while avoiding that the cycle of dynamic lighting control in the game display 40 or the proportion display 300 becomes longer than in the conventional case. In that case, it is possible to save space.

6. Explanation of big hit etc. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are "big hit" and "off" as a result of the big hit lottery (special symbol lottery). When the "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "disappear", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 41. If you win the jackpot, you open the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped (type of big winning) Is executed. The jackpot game is also called a special game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot game is a plurality of round games (unit opening game), an opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending after the final round game is finished. (Also referred to as ED) is included. Each round game is started by the end of OP or the end of the previous round game, and ended by the start of the next round game or the start of ED. The closing time (interval time) of the special winning opening between round games is included in the opening round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, there are roughly two types. It is a specific jackpot and a regular jackpot. The specific jackpot is also called “V long jackpot”, and the regular jackpot is also called “V short jackpot”. The "V long jackpot" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 in a first opening pattern (V long opening pattern) that allows the game ball to easily pass through the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. .. The "V short jackpot" is a jackpot that operates the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 in a second opening pattern (V short opening pattern) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game. is there.

More specifically, the "V long jackpot" that can be won in the lottery of the special map 1 (lottery of the first special symbol) is the maximum winning hole 30 of the first big winning hole 30 from 1R to 8R is 29.5 seconds at maximum. The first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R from 9R to 15R, and the second large winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R in 16R (final round). It's a big hit. That is, the total number of rounds for this jackpot is 16R, but the actual number of rounds is 9R. The substantial number of rounds is the number of rounds in which game balls can win up to the maximum number of winnings per round (8 in this embodiment). In this V long jackpot, from 9R to 15R, the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short, and it is a round where no prize ball can be expected. In addition, in 16R, it is possible to easily pass to the specific area 39 in the second special winning opening 35. In addition, when the "specific jackpot" is won by the lottery of special figure 1, "special figure 1_specific symbol" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a.

In addition, "V long jackpot" that can be won in the lottery of special map 2 (lottery of the second special symbol), from 1R to 15R, opens the first big winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, In the 16R (final round), the second special winning opening 35 is a jackpot that opens for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. In other words, the actual number of rounds for this jackpot is 16R. Of course, with 16R, it is possible to easily pass to the specific area 39 in the second special winning opening 35. When the "specific jackpot" is won by the lottery of special figure 2, "special figure 2_specific symbol" is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b.

On the other hand, the "V short jackpot" that can be won in the lottery of Special Figure 1 opens the 1st special winning opening 30 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R from 1R to 8R, and from 9R to 15R It is a jackpot in which the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R, and the second special winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 0.1 seconds per 1R in 16R (final round). In other words, the total number of rounds for this jackpot is 16R, but the actual number of rounds is 8R.

At 16R in this V-short jackpot, the opening time of the second special winning opening 35 is extremely short, and it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39 in the second special winning opening 35. In 16R in the V short jackpot, not only the opening time of the second special winning opening 35 is short, but also the opening timing of the second special winning opening 35 and the operation timing of the distribution member 71 (second state (FIG. 4). From the relationship between (see (B)) and the first state (see FIG. 4A), it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 39. When the "normal jackpot" is won by the lottery of special figure 1, "special figure 1_normal symbol" is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the passage of the game ball to the specific area 39 during the big hit game, the game state after the end of the big hit game is shifted to a high probability state described later. Therefore, when the above V long jackpot is won, by passing the game ball to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game can be shifted to a high probability state. On the other hand, when the V short jackpot is won, the gaming ball cannot be passed to the specific area 39 during the jackpot game, so the gaming state after the jackpot game is the normal probability state described later. (Non-high probability state).

However, even if it is controlled to the normal probability state, it is controlled to the time saving state described later. In this case, the number of time saving is set to 100 times. The number of saved times is the maximum number of times of execution of variable display of special symbols in the saved time state.

As shown in FIG. 37, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of Toku-zu 1 is 50% for the V long jackpot (specific jackpot) and 50% for the V short jackpot (normal jackpot). On the other hand, the jackpots won in the lottery of Toku-zu 2 are all V long jackpots (specific jackpots). As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game ball is won in the second starting port 21 rather than the jackpot lottery (the lottery of special figure 1) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The jackpot lottery (lottery of special figure 2) is set to be more advantageous to the player.

Here, in the present pachinko gaming machine 1, the lottery for whether or not it is a big hit is performed based on the "big hit random number", and the lottery for the type of the jackpot that is won is performed based on the "hit type random number". As shown in FIG. 38(A), the jackpot random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The hit type random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 9. In addition to the jackpot random number and the hit type random number, there are “reach random numbers” and “fluctuation pattern random numbers” as the random numbers acquired based on winning in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21.

The reach random number is a random number that determines whether or not a reach is generated in the effect design variation effect showing the result when the result of the jackpot determination is out. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed out of a plurality of effect symbols, and depending on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the jackpot is won. It is a state (for example, a state of "7↓7") that is a combination of the effect symbols shown. The effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if they are slightly shaking in the display screen 7a, or may be displayed so as to be repeatedly enlarged and reduced. This reach random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255.

The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining a variation pattern including the variation time of the special symbol. The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. In addition, as the random number acquired based on the passage to the gate 28, there is a normal symbol random number (per random number) shown in FIG. 38(B). The normal symbol random number is a random number for a lottery (normal symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric Chu 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535.

7. Description of gaming state Next, a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. The special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol display 42 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 have a probability variation function and a variation time reduction function, respectively. The state in which the probability varying function of the special symbol display 41 is operating is called "high probability state", and the state not operating is called "normal probability state (non-high probability state)". In the high probability state, the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal probability state. That is, the jackpot determination table is used to perform the jackpot determination using a jackpot determination table in which the value of the jackpot random number determined to be a jackpot is larger than that used in the normal probability state (see FIG. 39(A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol display device 41 is activated, the display result of the variation display of the special symbol by the special symbol display device 41 (that is, the stop symbol) is a jackpot symbol compared to when it is not operating. Becomes higher.

Further, a state in which the variable time reduction function of the special symbol display 41 is operating is called a "time saving state", and a state in which it is not operating is called a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time saving state. That is, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the special figure fluctuation pattern table that is determined such that the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is selected more frequently than the non-time saving state (see FIG. 40 ). That is, when the variation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 is activated, a short variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol as compared with when it is not activated. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure reservation is exhausted is increased, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) to the starting opening is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

The probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol display 41 may operate at the same time, or only one of them may operate. And the probability variation function and the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display device 42 are adapted to operate in synchronization with the variation time shortening function of the special symbol display device 41. That is, the probability variation function and the variation time reduction function of the normal symbol display 42 operate in the time saving state, but do not operate in the non-time saving state. Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability in the normal symbol lottery is higher than in the non-time saving state. In other words, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is determined to be a hit is greater than the normal symbol hit determination table that is used in the non-time saving state, using the normal symbol hit determination table, and hit determination (ordinary symbol hit) is performed ( FIG. 39(C)). That is, when the probability change function of the normal symbol display device 42 is activated, the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 42 is higher than that when it is not activated, and the probability that it is a normal hit symbol is high. ..

In the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. In this embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is 4 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (see FIG. 39(D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 41). That is, the opening time extension function of the power cable 22 is operating. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 41). That is, the function of increasing the number of times of opening the power cable 22 is operating.

Normally, the probability changing function and the changing time shortening function of the symbol display device 42, and the opening time extending function and the opening number increasing function of the power tube 22 are operating in a situation as compared with the case where these functions are not operating. As a result, the electric chu 22 is frequently opened, and the game ball is frequently won in the second starting opening 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, becomes high. Therefore, a state in which these functions are operating is called a "high base state", and a state in which these functions are not operating is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. It should be noted that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning by the electric starting 22 to the second starting opening 21) is being executed. Therefore, the high base state is also referred to as an electric support control state or an easy ball entry state. On the other hand, the low base state is also called a non-electric power assist control state or a non-ball entry easy state.

The high base state need not operate all of the above functions. That is, the operation of one or more functions of the probability variation function of the normal symbol display device 42, the variation time shortening function of the normal symbol display device 42, the opening time extension function of the power cable 22 and the opening frequency increasing function of the power cable 22. Therefore, it is sufficient that the electric tube 22 is opened more easily than when the function is not operating. Further, the high base state may be independently controlled without being associated with the time saving state.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V long jackpot is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the particular area 39 is passed during the jackpot game. It is in a state. This game state is particularly referred to as a "highly accurate and high base state". The high-probability-high base state ends when a variable display of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (160 times in this embodiment), or a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

Further, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V-short jackpot is a normal probability state (a non-high probability state, that is, a non-high-probability state, unless the specific area 39 is passed during the jackpot game). It is a state of low probability), a time saving state and a high base state. This gaming state is particularly called a "low accurate high base state". The low certainty high base state ends by a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) variable display of the special symbol, or by winning the jackpot and executing the jackpot game.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is played for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is the normal probability state, the non-time saving state, and the low base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low accurate low base state". The low accurate low base state may be referred to as a "normal game state". In addition, a state during execution of the special game (big hit game) will be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, the state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and the high base state will be referred to as a “privilege gaming state”.

In a high base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (see FIG. 3) by right-handing. This is because the electric support 22 makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. .. Therefore, while passing the game ball to the gate 28, which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, right-handing is performed to win the game ball to the second starting opening 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings (winnings at the starting opening) rather than hitting left. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the right-handed game is played even during the big hit game.

On the other hand, in the low base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (see FIG. 3) by left-handing. Since the electric support control is not executed, the electric Chu 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and the winning of the first starting opening 20 is easier than the winning of the second starting opening 21. Because it has become. Therefore, a left-hand hit is performed to win the game ball to the first starting opening 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes rather than hitting right.

8. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 [Main Control Main Processing] Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 56. The main counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM 84. The initial value of the counter is “0”, the initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, and the initial value of the status is “1”. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided in the main control board 80 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 42 from the ROM 83. As shown in the figure, in the main control main processing, first, power-on processing, which will be described later, is performed (S001).

Then, after the power-on process (S001), interrupts are prohibited (S002), and normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process is executed (S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S003), the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 38 are incremented by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than “0”, or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit such as a counter IC.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S003) is completed, the interrupt is permitted (S004). While interrupts are enabled, main timer interrupt processing (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on the interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU 82 at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, after the main-side timer interrupt process (S005) ends, until the next main-side timer interrupt process (S005) starts, various counters by normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) The value update process is repeatedly executed. When an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S004).

Here, before explaining the power-on process (S001), one of the features of this embodiment is to check whether or not the stored contents of the special memory 89 are correct. In the present embodiment, not only is the checksum of the RAM 84 (hereinafter referred to as "gaming RAM 84") calculated and stored at the time of power interruption due to business closing or power failure, but also the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated and stored. I'm supposed to do it. The checksum is one of error detection codes calculated to check the reliability of each stored data (command, etc.). In the present embodiment, each data stored in the game RAM 84 or the special memory 89 is regarded as a hexadecimal value, and the sum of the respective values is used as a checksum. However, the checksum may be a value calculated by another method.

In this embodiment, the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off. Then, it is checked whether the checksum value of the special memory 89 calculated at this time matches the checksum value stored at the time of power interruption. As a result, if the checksum values match, the contents stored in the special memory 89 (the value of the counter for 100 balls, the value of the actual total prize ball number counter, the value of the prize prize ball counter, the continuous prize prize) The value of the ball counter, the value of the variation counter, etc.) is determined to be normal. Thereby, the output rate can be displayed with the correct storage content of the special memory 89. On the other hand, if the checksum values do not match, it is determined that the storage content of the special memory 89 is abnormal. As a result, it is possible to erase the stored contents of the special memory 89 and avoid displaying the percentage with incorrect stored contents.

[Power-On Process] As shown in FIG. 43, in the power-on process (S001), access permission to the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 is first set (S011). Thereby, it becomes possible to write and read information to and from the gaming RAM 84 and the special memory 89. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated (whether it is ON) (S012). That is, it is determined whether or not a signal based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 is received from the power supply board 150. If the RAM clear switch 152 is operated (YES in S012), the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if it is not operated (NO in S012), it is subsequently determined whether or not the power-off flag is ON (S013). The power failure flag is a flag that indicates the occurrence of power failure, and is a flag that is turned on in a power failure monitoring process (see FIG. 56) described later.

If the power-off flag is not ON (NO at S013), the power may not have been shut off normally, so the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (YES in S013), the checksum of the gaming RAM 84 is calculated (S014), and the checksum of the gaming RAM 84 stored (stored) at the time of power interruption ( 56 (see step S2903 in FIG. 56) (S015). If these checksum values do not match (NO in S015), it is determined that the contents stored in the game RAM 84 are abnormal, and the flow proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S015), it is determined that the contents stored in the gaming RAM 84 are normal, and the flow proceeds to step S016.

In step S016, setting management of the work area of the game RAM 84 at power recovery is performed. In this setting process, power recovery information is read from the ROM 83, and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the game RAM 84. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the power-off flag (S017), and proceeds to step S021.

On the other hand, in step S018, all the information stored in the game RAM 84 is cleared (S018). However, at this time, the contents stored in the special memory 89 (the value of the counter for 100 balls, the value of the actual total prize ball number counter, the value of the character prize ball number counter, the value of the continuous character prize ball number counter, the number of fluctuation counters) The values, character ratio, and continuous character ratio (see FIG. 11C) are not cleared. Thus, as described above, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to calculate the output rate as a converged value by not clearing the stored contents of the special memory 89. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 initializes the work area of the game RAM 84 (S019). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the ROM 83 is set in the work area of the game RAM 84. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a RAM clear notification command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the clearing of the storage contents of the game RAM 84 in the output buffer (S020), and proceeds to step S021.

In step S021, the game control microcomputer 81 calculates the checksum of the special memory 89, and checks the checksum of the checksum storage area of the special memory 89 that was stored (stored) at the time of power interruption (see FIG. 56). (See step S2905) (S022). If these checksum values do not match (NO in S022), it is determined that the storage content of the special memory 89 is abnormal, and all the information stored in the special memory 89 is cleared (S023). That is, the value of each counter shown in FIG. 11C is reset to “0” and the information stored in each storage area is erased. In this way, as described above, it is possible to avoid displaying the percentage with the wrong stored contents of the special memory 89. Then, a special memory clear command for notifying the sub control board 90 of the clearing of the stored contents of the special memory 89 is set in the output buffer (S024), and the process proceeds to step S025. On the other hand, if the checksum values match in step S022, it is determined that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are normal, the processes of steps S023 and S024 are passed, and the process proceeds to step S025.

In step S025, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other initial settings such as the setting of the CPU 82, the settings of SIO, PIO, and CTC (circuit for managing the interrupt time), and the present processing ends.

[Main Timer Interrupt Processing] Next, the main timer interrupt processing (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 44, in the main timer interrupt process (S005), first, the input process described later is executed (S101). Then, in the same way as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process (S003) performed in the main control main process of FIG. 42, the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process is executed (S102). Next, a starting port sensor detection process described later is executed (S103), and a normal operation process is executed (S104).

In the normal operation process (S104), mainly, the normal symbol random number acquired in the starting mouth sensor process (S103) is determined, the process for displaying the normal symbol indicating the determination result (variable display and stop display) To execute. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing the variable display of the normal symbols at the timing of starting the variable display of the normal symbols, and the data information is stored in the game RAM 84. Set in the third game data storage area (see FIG. 11B). The third game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing each of the game light emitting portions LA17 to LA24 of the third light emitting area 430 (see FIG. 12) including the normal symbol display 42 to emit light. Is. Further, the game control microcomputer 81, at the timing to start the stop display of the normal symbol, the data information (light emission data) for performing the stop display of the ordinary symbol (ordinary winning symbol or ordinary lost symbol) indicating the determination result of the ordinary symbol ) Is created and its data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

After the normal operation process (S104), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a special operation process described later (S105). Next, a specific area sensor detection process is executed (S106). In the specific area sensor detection processing (S106), it is determined whether or not the game ball is detected by the specific area sensor 39a, and if detected, the V flag indicating the transition to the high probability state is turned on. Further, as the V flag is turned ON, a V passage command for causing the sub control board 90 to notify the V passage is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84.

After the specific area sensor detection processing (S106), the game control microcomputer 81 executes output processing (S107) described later and power-off monitoring processing (S108) described later. After that, other processing (S109) is executed, and the main timer interrupt processing (S005) ends. Then, steps S002 to S004 of the main control main process are repeatedly executed until the interrupt pulse is next input to the CPU 82 (see FIG. 42), and when the interrupt pulse is input (after about 4 msec), the main again. The side timer interrupt process (S005) is executed.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 45, in the input processing (S101), first, various sensors (first starting opening sensor 20a, second starting opening sensor 21a, first large opening sensor) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are firstly installed. The detection signals detected by the winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a and the like (see FIG. 9) are read (S110). Then, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is a winning detection signal relating to payout of prize balls (S111). If it is not the winning detection signal (NO in S111), other processing (S122) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S118. For example, if it is a fraud detection signal detected by a magnetic sensor, an impact sensor, or the like, a process for giving a fraud notice is executed as another process (S122).

On the other hand, if it is a winning detection signal (YES in S111), the award ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. 11(A) is referred to (S112). As shown in FIG. 11(A), the prize ball number counter addition table indicates the number of prize balls according to the type of winning hole, and also has a 100-ball counter, a prize prize ball counter, and a continuous prize prize ball count. It is a table showing which of the counters the number of prize balls is counted up (added to). After referring to the prize ball counter addition table (S112), a prize ball command for paying out the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 110 by an output process (S107) described later.

After step S113, the game control microcomputer 81 executes prize ball number counter addition processing, which will be described later, based on the referred prize ball number counter addition table (S114). Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine frame 50 (the inner frame 52 is opened with respect to the outer frame 51), that is, whether or not there is a detection by the frame opening detection switch 50a (S115). If detected (YES in S115), it is subsequently determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S116). The customer waiting flag is a flag indicating that it is in the customer waiting state in which the variable display of the special symbol is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed. If the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S116), the proportion calculation process described later is executed (S117), and the process proceeds to step S118. On the other hand, if there is no detection by the frame opening detection switch 50a (NO in S115) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S116), the proportion calculation process (S117) is not executed and the process proceeds to step S118.

That is, in the present embodiment, the proportion calculation processing (S117, specific calculation processing) is performed only when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and is in the customer waiting state is satisfied. This is based on the following reasons. That is, the gaming control microcomputer 81 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a limited processing capacity. Then, during execution of variable display of the special symbol or during control to the big hit game state (game control state), compared to the customer waiting state, the game control microcomputer 81 is under control with a large load. Therefore, in addition to the control processing (specific control processing) relating to the variable display of the special symbols or the control processing (specific control processing) during the control of the jackpot gaming state, if the game control microcomputer 81 has a large load division If the processing up to the proportion calculation processing (S117) is performed, there is a possibility that the processing load will be excessive. From the above, in the game control state where the burden of control processing is large, the proportion calculation processing (S117) is not performed, and in the customer waiting state where the burden of control processing is small, by performing the proportion calculation processing (S117), It is possible to distribute the control processing load of the game control microcomputer 81. Further, as will be described later, when the gaming machine frame 50 is closed or is not in the customer waiting state (when the display condition is not satisfied), the output rate indicator 300 shows the output rate (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio). Is not displayed. Therefore, when the proportion is not displayed, the proportion calculation processing (S117) is not executed, so that unnecessary control processing is not performed.

In step S118, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated. If not operated (NO in S118), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is operated (YES in S118), it is determined whether or not the display flag at the present time is "1" (S119). The display flag indicates a value of either "1" or "2". If the display flag is "1" (YES in S119), the display flag is switched to "2" (S120), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S119), the display flag is switched to "1" (S121), and this processing is finished. That is, each time the RAM clear switch 152 is operated, the display flag is switched to "1" or "2".

Here, the relationship between the display flag and the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 will be described. As will be described later, when the proportion is displayed, the character ratio is displayed when the display flag is "1", and the continuous character ratio is displayed when the display flag is "2". There is. Therefore, every time a person who confirms the proportion operates the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to switch between the display of the character role ratio and the display of the continuous character ratio. In the past, the RAM clear switch 152 was only operated when the power was turned on. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the existing RAM clear switch 152 is effectively used as an operating means for switching between the display of the accessory role ratio and the display of the continuous accessory ratio without providing a new switch.

[Award Ball Number Counter Addition Processing] As shown in FIG. 46, in the award ball number counter addition processing (S114), first, the types of winning detection signals read in step S110 of FIG. 45 and the awards shown in FIG. 11(A). The value of the 100-ball counter is added based on the sphere counter addition table (S201). For example, in the case of winning in the regular winning opening 27, the value of the counter for 100 balls is incremented by “8”, and in the case of winning in the first big winning opening 30, the value of the counter for 100 balls is set to “15”. "Only add Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the 100-ball counter is "100" or more (S202). If it is less than "100" (NO in S202), the process proceeds to step S205. On the other hand, if "100" or more (YES in S202), the value of the actual total award ball counter is incremented by "1", and the value of the counter for 100 balls is decremented by "100", and the process proceeds to step S205. move on. In this way, it is possible to measure the total number of prize balls acquired by the player as one in 100-ball units.

In step S205, it is determined whether or not the winning is to the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35). If it is a prize at the special winning opening (YES in S205), the value of the character prize ball number counter is incremented by "15" (S206), and the value of the continuous character prize ball number counter is incremented by "15". Then (S207), the present process ends. On the other hand, if the winning is not in the special winning opening (NO in S205), then it is determined whether or not the winning is in the electric Chu 22 (second starting opening 21) (S208). If it is a prize to the electric power chute 22 (YES in S208), the value of the accessory prize ball number counter is incremented by "7" (S209), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if the winning is not in the electric Chu 22 (S208), it is the winning in the normal winning opening 27 or the first starting opening 20, and therefore, the winning a prize ball counter or the continuous winning a prize ball counter is set. This process ends without adding.

[Proportion Calculation Processing] As shown in FIG. 47, in the proportion calculation processing (S117), it is first determined whether or not the value of the actual total prize ball counter is “1” or more (S301). If it is "1" or more (YES in S301), the accessory ratio calculation process is executed (S302). Specifically, the value of the accessory prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball number counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the accessory ratio as a percentage value without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In the calculated accessory ratio, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the character ratio is stored in the character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (see FIG. 11C) (S303).

Then, a continuous winning role ratio calculation process is executed (S304). Specifically, the value of the continuous winning prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the actual total prize ball number counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the continuous accessory ratio as a percentage value without performing a multiplication process of 100 times. In addition, in the calculated continuous character ratio, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the continuous character ratio is stored in the continuous character ratio storage area (see FIG. 11C) of the special memory (S305), and the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the actual total award ball number counter is not "1" or more in step S301, it is "0", and this processing ends. That is, when the value of the actual total prize ball number counter is "0", the process cannot be divided by the value of the denominator which is "0" in the process of step S302 or S304, so this process is immediately ended.

[Starting Port Sensor Detection Process] As shown in FIG. 48, in the starting port sensor detection process (S103), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game sensor is detected by the gate sensor 28a. It is determined whether or not (S401). If the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S401), a gate passage process (S402) is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S401), the process passes through the gate passage process (S402) and proceeds to step S403. In the gate passage process (S402), if the gate sensor 28a is ON, the normal symbol random number (see FIG. 38(B)) is acquired on condition that the stored normal symbol random number is less than four. , And is stored in the universal figure reservation storage unit 86. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the universal figure reservation, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

In step S403, it is determined whether or not a game ball has been won in the second starting port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 21a (S403). If the game ball has not won in the second starting port 21 (NO in S403), the process proceeds to step S407, but if the game ball has won in the second starting port 21 (YES in S403), the special figure 2 Whether or not the number of reserved balls (the number of second special figure reservations, specifically, the value of the counter for counting the number of second special figure reservations provided in the game RAM 84) has reached “4” (upper limit memory number) It is determined (S404). If the special map 2 number of reserved balls has reached "4" (YES in S404), the process proceeds to step S407, but if the special figure 2 number of reserved balls is less than "4" (in S404, NO), 1 is added to the special figure 2 number of reserved balls (S405). At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the second special figure reservation, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. ..

Subsequently, special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing (S406) is performed. In special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (S406), big hit random number counter value (label-TRND-A), hit classification random number counter value (label-TRND-AS), reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and fluctuation The pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is obtained (that is, the random number group shown in FIG. 38A is obtained), and the obtained random numbers are the current special figure in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b. 2 The number is stored in the storage area of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b according to the number of reserved balls.

Subsequently, in the starting opening sensor detection processing (S103), it is determined whether or not a game ball is won in the first starting opening 20, that is, whether or not the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a (S407). .. If the game ball has not been won in the first starting port 20 (NO in S407), the process is ended, but if the game ball has been won in the first starting port 20 (YES in S407), the special map 1 is reserved. Whether or not the number of balls (the number of the first special figure reservation, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of the first special figure reservation provided in the game RAM 84) has reached "4" (maximum storage number) A determination is made (S408). Then, if the special map 1 number of reserved balls has reached "4" (YES in S408), the processing is ended, but if the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is less than "4" (NO in S408). ), and "1" is added to the special map 1 number of reserved balls (S409). At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the first special figure reservation, and sets the data information in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. ..

Then, special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing (S410) is performed. In special figure 1 relation random number acquisition processing (S410), as in special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing (S406), big hit random number counter value (label-TRND-A), hit type random number counter value (label-TRND-AS) , The reach random number counter value (label-TRND-RC) and the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are obtained (that is, the random number group shown in FIG. 38A is obtained), and the obtained random number values are obtained. It stores in the storage area of the 1st special figure reservation storage section 85a which corresponds to the present special figure 1 reservation number of balls among the 1st special figure reservation storage section 85a.

[Special operation processing] As shown in FIG. 49, in the special operation processing (S105), the processing relating to the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into four stages. The "special operation statuses 1, 2, 3, 4" are assigned to the respective stages. When the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S1301), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (S1302), and the "special operation status" is "2". In the case (NO in S1301, YES in S1303), the special symbol changing process (S1304) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in S1301 and S1303, YES in S1305) , The special symbol determination process (S1306) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4" (S1301, S1303, S1305 are all NO), the special electric auditors product process (S1307) is performed. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby process] As shown in FIG. 50, in the special symbol standby process (S1302), first, whether or not the number of holding balls of the second starting port 21 (that is, the number of special figure 2 holding balls) is "0". Is determined (S1401). When the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is "0" (YES in S1401), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls of special figure 1) is "0" ( S1407). If the special map 1 number of reserved balls is also “0” (YES in S1407), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1416). If it is ON (YES in S1416), this processing is ended. If it is not ON (NO in S1416), the customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1417), and this processing is ended.

When the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is not "0" in step S1401 (NO in S1401), the special figure 2 jackpot determination process is executed (S1402). In the special figure 2 jackpot determination process (S1402), the jackpot random number counter value (see FIG. 38(A)) is read to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. If it is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned ON, and the hit type random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) is read to determine the hit type. Next, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1403), the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 is selected by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) shown in FIG. ..

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the special figure 2 reserved ball number by 1 (S1404). At this time, data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the second special figure reservation is created, and the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. Then, the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted by one toward the side where it is read from the current position, and the first reservation in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is performed. The storage area corresponding to is cleared (S1405). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1406), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1406), the special operation status is set to "2" and the fluctuation start command is set to the output buffer of the RAM 84 for game. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing variable display of the second special symbol, and stores the data information in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (FIG. 11 (B ) See)). The second game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing each of the game light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 of the second special symbol display 41b (see FIG. 12) to emit light.

If the special map 2 number of reserved balls is "0" but the special map 1 number of reserved balls is not "0" (YES in S1401 and NO in S1407), the special map 1 jackpot determination process is executed (S1408). In the special figure 1 jackpot determination process (S1408), the jackpot random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) is read to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. If it is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned ON, and the hit type random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) is read to determine the hit type. Next, in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection processing (S1409), the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 is selected by the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (see FIG. 38A) shown in FIG. ..

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the special figure 1 reserved ball number by 1 (S1410). At this time, data information (light emission data) for changing the display of the first special figure reservation is created, and the data information is set in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84. Then, the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is shifted by one toward the side to be read from the current position, and the first reservation in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is performed. The storage area corresponding to is cleared (S1411). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 81 executes special figure 1 variation start processing (S1412), and proceeds to step S1413. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1412), the special operation status is set to "2" and the fluctuation start command is set to the output buffer of the RAM 84 for game. At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing variable display of the first special symbol, and stores the data information in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 (FIG. 11(B ) See)). The first game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing each of the game light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 of the first special symbol display 41a (see FIG. 12) to emit light.

In step S1413, the value of the variation counter of the special memory 89 is incremented by "1". In this way, the number of fluctuations (the number of fluctuation display of special symbols) since the power is first turned on for the pachinko gaming machine 1 is counted. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1414). If the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1414), the customer waiting flag is turned OFF (S1415), and this processing is finished.

In the special symbol variation process (S1304) shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether the variation time of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) has elapsed. If the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variable stop command is set in the output buffer, and the special operation status is set to "3". At this time, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for performing the stop display of the first special symbol indicating the result of the lottery of the special diagram 1 if it is the time to stop and display the first special symbol. Then, the data information is set in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84. On the other hand, if it is the timing to stop and display the second special symbol, the data information (light emission data) for performing the stop display of the second special symbol showing the result of the lottery of the special symbol 2 is created, and the data information is displayed. It is set in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

In the special symbol determination process (S1306) shown in FIG. 49, it is determined whether or not the stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol, and if it is a jackpot symbol, a special operation status is set in order to execute the special electric auditors product process (S1307). Set to "4". At this time, the jackpot opening command is set in the output buffer. If it is not a big hit symbol, the special operation status is set to "1" to execute the special symbol waiting process (S1302) again. In the special symbol determination process (S1306), in order to manage the control period in the high probability state, if the probability variation flag is ON, the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1, and if it is "0", the probability variation flag is set. Turn off. Further, in order to manage the control period of the time saving state (that is, the high base state), when the time saving flag is ON, the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1, and when it becomes "0", the time saving flag is turned OFF. Further, when the special operation status is set to "4", if the probability variation flag or the time saving flag is ON, it is returned to OFF. In other words, during the big hit game, it is controlled to a low accurate low base state.

In this special symbol determination process (S1306), the game control microcomputer 81, when changing the game state, creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the game state, and uses that data information for the game. Set in the fourth game data storage area (see FIG. 11B) of the RAM 84 for use. The fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84 is a storage area for storing data information for causing each of the game light emitting portions LA25 to LA32 of the fourth light emitting area 440 (see FIG. 12) including the game status indicator 46 to emit light. Is. Further, when starting the big hit game, the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying that it is in a state where the player should hit the right hand side, and the data information is stored in the RAM 84 for the game. 4 Set in the game data storage area. Furthermore, the data information (light emission data) for displaying the number of rounds in the jackpot game is created, and the data information is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

[Special electric auditors product processing (big hit game)] As shown in FIG. 51, in the special electric auditors product processing (S1307), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2201). The jackpot end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the jackpot (the first jackpot 30 or the second jackpot 35) has been completed in the jackpot game being executed.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2201), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening is open (S2202). If it is not open (NO in S2202), whether it is time to open the special winning opening, that is, whether the opening time of the jackpot game has elapsed and the opening start time in the first round game has been reached, or It is determined whether or not the interval time (closing time) until the once-closed special winning opening is opened has reached the opening start time (S2203).

If the decision result in the step S2203 is NO, the process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the decision result in the step S2203 is YES, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game currently being executed is a jackpot game as a V long jackpot (S2204). If it is not the V-long jackpot, the process proceeds to step S2207, but if it is the V-long jackpot, it is determined whether it is the timing to start the 16th round in which the game ball can pass to the specific area 39 (S2205). If it is not the timing to start the 16th round (NO in S2205), the process directly proceeds to step S2207. On the other hand, if it is the timing to start the 16th round (YES in S2205), the V valid period setting process (S2206) is performed.

In the V valid period setting process (S2206), the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is valid during the opening of the second special winning opening 35 in the 16th round and for several seconds after the second special winning opening 35 is closed. Set to the V valid period to be determined. In the present embodiment, the other period (including the case where the big hit game is not executed) is set as the V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the specific area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid.

In step S2207, the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) is opened in accordance with the opening pattern (see FIG. 37) according to the type of big hit. In addition, the distribution member 71 is always moving in a constant motion from the start of the round game (or the jackpot game).

In subsequent step S2208, round designation command transmission determination processing is performed. In the round designation command transmission determination processing (S2208), it is determined whether or not the opening of the special winning opening in step S2207 is the first opening in one round game. A round designation command including information on the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84.

In step S2202 of the special electric auditors product processing (S1307), if the special winning opening is open (YES in S2202), it is determined whether or not the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied (S2209). In the present embodiment, the closing condition is that the number of winning prizes to the special winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum winning prize (8 pieces per 1R in the present embodiment) or the time to close the special winning opening is reached. That is, any one of the things (that is, a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 37) has elapsed after opening the special winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the conditions for closing the special winning opening are not satisfied (NO in S2209), the process is ended.

On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the special winning opening are satisfied (YES in S2209), the special winning opening is closed (blocked) (S2210). When one round game is completed by closing the step S2210 (YES in S2211), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2212), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0". Yes (S2213). If it is not "0" (NO in S2013), the process is finished as it is to start the next round game.

On the other hand, if it is "0" (YES in S2213), as a jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game, the jackpot ending command is set (S2214) and the jackpot ending is started (S2215). Then, the jackpot end flag is set (S2216), and this processing ends.

If the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2201 (YES in S2201), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed (S2217), and the ending time has passed. If not (NO in S2217), the process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2217), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2218), the jackpot flag is turned off (S2219), and the special operation status is set to "1" (S2220). After that, the game state setting process (S2221) is performed, and this process ends.

In the game state setting process (S2221), it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned V flag is ON. If the V flag is not ON, the time saving flag is turned ON and the time saving counter is set to "100". As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time is controlled to a low-probability-high base state in which the number of time saving is set to 100 times. On the other hand, if the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are turned ON, and "160" is set in the probability variation counter and the time saving counter. As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a highly accurate high base state in which the so-called ST count is set to 160 times.

In this game state setting process (S2221), the game control microcomputer 81 creates data information (light emission data) for displaying the changed game state in order to change the game state, and the data information It is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84. Further, in order to end the jackpot game, data information for erasing the display of the number of rounds is created, and the data information is set in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84.

[Output Processing] The game control microcomputer 81 executes output processing (S107) after the above-described special operation processing (S105) and specific area sensor detection processing (S106) (see FIG. 44). In the output process (S107), as shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (the inner frame 52 is relative to the outer frame 51), that is, whether there is a detection by the frame opening detection switch 50a. It is determined whether or not (S2301). If the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301), that is, if there is no detection by the frame opening detection switch 50a, a game display process described later is executed (S2303) and the process proceeds to step S2305. The game display process (S2303) is a process for displaying on the game display device 40 game information (a big hit symbol, a game state, etc.) related to the progress of the game.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301), then it is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON, that is, the customer waiting state (S2302). If the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the game display processing is executed (S2303), and the process proceeds to step S2305. On the other hand, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), a proportion display process (specific display process) described later is executed (S2304), and the process proceeds to step S2305. The proportion display processing (S2304) is processing for displaying the proportion on the proportion display device 300. In step S2305, as other output setting processing, the command set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 84 of the main control board 80 is output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, etc., and the main processing is performed. To finish.

In this way, in the present embodiment, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed, or if the special symbols are variable displayed or the big hit game is being executed, the game display processing (S2303) is executed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame is open and the variable display of the special symbol and the big hit game are not executed, the proportion display processing (S2304) is executed. In other words, the display condition (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “display condition”) for displaying the output ratio on the output ratio display 300 is limited to that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and is in the waiting state for customers. ing. The reason for limiting the display conditions in this way is based on the following reasons.

First, as described above, the proportion display device 300 is arranged on the main control board 80 in order to allow the person who confirms the proportion to confirm the proportion as reliable information. Therefore, the proportion display device 300 cannot be visually recognized unless the gaming machine frame 50 is opened. Therefore, it is preferable that the display condition is that the gaming machine frame 50 is opened so that the proportion indicator can be visually recognized. That is, according to the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the present embodiment, from the viewpoint of avoiding the increase of IC as much as possible and preventing the blink in the dynamic lighting control, the display on the game display 40 is displayed. The display on the rate display 300 becomes alternative. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 50 is open, the game is basically not played by the player, and thus it is not necessary to display the game information on the game display 40.

However, immediately after the gaming machine frame 50 is opened, the variable display of the special symbol is still being executed, or when the gaming ball enters the starting openings 20 and 21 and the variable display of the special symbol is started. possible. In this case, it is necessary to display the game information on the game display 40. That is, it is necessary not to display the output ratio on the output display 300. In this way, the display condition is limited to the waiting state for the customer in addition to the opening of the gaming machine frame 50. It should be noted that the proportion is not shown to the player, but to a person who inspects whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illegally modified, and is basically only shown at the time of inspection. It is enough if it is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to display the participation rate during the game, and there is no problem even if the display conditions are limited as described above.

[Game Display Processing] In the game display processing (S2303), first, as shown in FIG. 53, it is determined whether or not the common flag is "1". The common flag is set to any value of "1" or "2" or "3" or "4", and in any one of the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display 40. This shows whether or not light emission control is performed.

If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2401), the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is first output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2402). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched (set) to the “H” level (S2403) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emitting state in the fourth light emitting region 440 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[1000] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2404). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2405) (see FIG. 18). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the first light emitting region 410. Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the first game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D[0...7] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2406). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2407) (see FIG. 19). As a result, it is possible to cause the gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 to emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, a jackpot pattern) to be displayed in the first light emitting area 410. Then, the common flag is switched to "2" (S2408), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "1" in step S2401, the flow advances to step S2409 to determine whether the common flag is "2". If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2409), first, the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2410). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2411) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emitting state in the first light emitting region 410 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2412). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2413) (see FIG. 20). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the second light emitting region 420. Subsequently, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the second game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D[0...7] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2414). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2415) (see FIG. 21). As a result, it is possible to cause the gaming light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 to emit light in a light emitting mode (for example, a lost pattern) to be displayed in the second light emitting area 420. Then, the common flag is switched to "3" (S2416), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "2" in step S2409, the flow advances to step S2417 to determine whether the common flag is "3". If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2417), first, the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2418). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2419) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emitting state in the second light emitting region 420 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2420). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2421) (see FIG. 22). As a result, the light emitting region capable of emitting light becomes the third light emitting region 430. Then, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the third game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D[0...7] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2422). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2423) (see FIG. 23). As a result, it is possible to cause the gaming light emitting portions LA17 to LA24 to emit light in the light emitting manner to be displayed in the third light emitting area 430. Then, the common flag is switched to "4" (S2424), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "3" in step S2417, it means that the common flag is set to "4", and the flow advances to step S2425. In step S2425, the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2426) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the light emitting state in the third light emitting region 430 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2427). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2428) (see FIG. 24). As a result, the light emitting region capable of emitting light becomes the fourth light emitting region 440. Then, based on the data information (light emission data) stored in the fourth game data storage area of the game RAM 84, the data information D[0...7] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2429). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2430) (see FIG. 25). As a result, it is possible to cause the game light emitting units LA25 to LA32 to emit light in the light emitting manner to be displayed in the fourth light emitting area 440. Then, the common flag is switched to "1" (S2431), and this processing ends.

[Proportion Display Processing] In the display processing (S2304), as shown in FIG. 54, first, it is determined whether the common flag is “1” (S2501). The common flag is also used in the game display processing (S2303) described above, but it indicates which lighting area of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the output indicator 300 is to be used for lighting control.

If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2501), the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is first output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2502). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2503) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the fourth lighting region 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[1000] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2504). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2505) (see FIG. 27). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the first lighting area 310. Subsequently, it is determined whether the display flag is "1" (S2506). As described above, the display flag is switched to either "1" or "2" by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 (see FIG. 45), and if "1", the display of the accessory ratio is displayed. If it is "2", it indicates the display of the continuous accessory ratio. If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2506), data for displaying the tens digit of the character ratio stored in the character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Information D[0...7] is output (S2507). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2506), the tens digit of the continuous character ratio stored in the continuous character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is displayed from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the data information D[0...7] for outputting is output (S2508). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2509) (see FIG. 28). Accordingly, it is possible to light the output lighting units LB1 to LB8 in a lighting mode (for example, “6”) to be displayed in the first lighting region 310. Then, the common flag is switched to "2" (S2510), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "1" in step S2501, the flow advances to step S2511 to determine whether the common flag is "2". If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2511), first, the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2512). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2513) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2514). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2515) (see FIG. 29). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the second lighting area 320. Then, it is determined whether the display flag is "1" (S2516). If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2516), data for displaying the ones digit of the accessory ratio stored in the accessory ratio storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Information D[0...7] is output (S2517). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2516), the first digit of the continuous character ratio stored in the continuous character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 is displayed from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the data information D[0...7] for outputting is output (S2518). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2519) (see FIG. 30). Accordingly, it is possible to light the output lighting units LB9 to LB16 in the lighting mode (for example, “0”) that should be displayed in the second lighting region 320. Then, the common flag is switched to "3" (S2520), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "2" in step S2511, the process proceeds to step S2521 as shown in FIG. 55, and it is determined whether the common flag is "3". If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2521), the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is first output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2522). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2523) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2524). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2525) (see FIG. 31). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the third lighting area 330. Subsequently, it is determined whether the display flag is "1" (S2526).

If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2526), the data information D[0...7] for displaying "1" is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2527). That is, the data information D[0...7]=[01100000] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2529), the proportion lighting units LB18 and LB19 in the third lighting region 330 are lit, and “1” is displayed. In this way, in the present embodiment, if “1” is displayed in the third lighting region 330, the person who confirms the output rate will see the two digits displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320. Make them understand that the number (proportion) is the ratio of character goods.

On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2526), the data information D[0...7] for displaying "2" is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2528). That is, the data information D[0...7]=[11011010] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2529) (see FIG. 32), the proportion lighting units LB17, LB18, LB20, LB21, LB23 of the third lighting region 330 are lit, "2" is displayed. In this way, in the present embodiment, if “2” is displayed in the third lighting area 330, the person who confirms the output rate will see the two digits displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320. Make them understand that the number (proportion) is the ratio of continuous roles. In step S2530, the common flag is switched to "4", and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "3" in step S2521, it means that the common flag is "4", and the process proceeds to step S2531. In step S2531, the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2532) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2533). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2534) (see FIG. 33). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the fourth lighting area 340.

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total prize ball counter of the special memory 89 is "100" or more (S2535). That is, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls has reached “10000” since the power was first turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. If it is "100" or more (YES in S2535), the process advances to step S2536. On the other hand, if it is not "100" or more (NO in S2535), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter of the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (S2537). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations since the first power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has reached “3000”. If it is "3000" or more (YES in S2537), the process proceeds to step S2536. In step S2536, data information D[0...7] for displaying "1" is output. That is, the data information D[0...7]=D[01100000] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2539) (see FIG. 34), the proportion lighting units LB26 and LB27 in the fourth lighting region 340 are lit, and “1” is displayed. It In this way, in the present embodiment, if “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, the person who confirms the output ratio will have the output ratio (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio) converged to some extent. Make sure that it is a valid value.

On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize ball number counter is less than "100" (NO in S2535) and the value of the fluctuation number counter is less than "3000" (NO in S2537), the process proceeds to step S2538. .. In step S2538, the data information D[0...7] for displaying "0" is output. That is, the data information D[0...7]=[11111100] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2539), the proportion lighting units LB25, LB26, LB27, LB28, LB29, LB30 of the fourth lighting region 340 are lit, and “0” is displayed. Is displayed. In this way, in the present embodiment, if “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340, the person who confirms the output rate still converges on the displayed output rate (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio). Make them understand that it is a reference value that may not have been applied. In step S2540, the common flag is switched to "1", and this processing ends.

[Power Shutdown Monitoring Processing] The game control microcomputer 81 executes the power shutoff monitoring processing (S108) after the above-described output processing (S107) (see FIG. 44). In the power-off monitoring process (S108), as shown in FIG. 56, it is first determined whether or not a power-off signal is input (S2901), and if there is no input (NO in S2901), the process ends. The power-off signal is a signal input by the game control microcomputer 81 when the monitored power source voltage starts to drop due to power interruption. Specifically, the power supply board 150 monitors the generated voltage of 32V, and when the voltage becomes 17V (predetermined voltage value) or less, outputs a power-off signal to the game control microcomputer 81, and from that time onward A reset signal is output after a lapse of time. The voltage to be monitored and the voltage value (predetermined voltage value) when the power-off signal is output can be changed as appropriate.

If the power-off signal is input in step S2901 (YES in S2901), the checksum of the gaming RAM 84 is calculated (S2902), and the calculated checksum is stored in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2903). .. Next, the checksum of the special memory 89 is calculated (S2904), and the calculated checksum is stored in the checksum storage area of the special memory 89 (see FIG. 11C) (S2905). Then, the power-off flag is turned on (S2906), and access to the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 is prohibited (S2907). This makes it impossible to write or read information to or from the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89. After that, the loop processing is performed without returning to the main timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 44).

9. Operation of production control microcomputer 91 [Sub-control main processing] Next, the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 61. A counter, a timer, a flag, a status, a buffer, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM 94. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub control board 90 reads out and executes the sub control main processing program shown in FIG. 57 from the ROM 93.

As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main processing, it is determined whether or not the sub-side power-off flag (a flag that is turned on when the power is turned off) is ON and the contents of the RAM 94 are normal (S4001). If the determination result is NO, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM 94 are abnormal even if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, the RAM 94 is initialized. Then (S4002), the process proceeds to step S4003.

On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4001), that is, if the sub-side power-off flag has been turned ON due to power interruption but the contents of the RAM 94 are normally maintained, then the RAM is cleared. It is determined whether the notification command is received (S4011). If the RAM clear notification command is received (YES in S4011), the contents stored in the game RAM 84 of the main control board 80 are cleared. Therefore, the contents stored in the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 are cleared (S4002), and the process proceeds to step S4003. On the other hand, if the RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO in S4011), the process proceeds to step S4003 without clearing the stored contents of the RAM 94.

In step S4003, other initial settings are made. In other initial settings, for example, settings of the CPU 92, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), and the like are performed. If the sub-side power-off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

In step S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, a random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various effect determination random number counters are updated. Note that the random numbers for effect determination include random numbers for effect symbol determination for determining effect symbols, random numbers for determining variable effect pattern for determining variable effect patterns, and random numbers for predictor effect determination for determining various notice effects. Etc. The method of updating the random number may be the same as the method of updating the random number performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating, the random number values may be added not by one, but by two or the like. This is the same in the random number updating process performed by the main control board 80 described above.

When the random number seed update processing (S4005) is completed, command transmission processing is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process (S4006), various commands stored in the output buffer in the RAM 94 of the sub control board 90 are transmitted to the image control board 100. Upon receiving the command, the image control board 100 executes various effects (variation effect, jackpot effect including opening effect, round effect, and ending effect) using the image display device 7 according to the command. Note that the sub-control board 90 outputs sound from the speaker 67 via the sound control board 106 as the image control board 100 executes various effects. Further, the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are caused to emit light and the board movable body 15 is driven through the sub-driving board 107 and the relay board 108. The production control microcomputer 91 subsequently permits interruption (S4007). After that, steps S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the reception interrupt process (S4008), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed.

[Reception Interrupt Process] In the reception interrupt process (S4008), when the strobe signal (STB signal) is turned on, that is, the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the production control microcomputer 91. Is a process executed prior to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010). As shown in FIG. 41, in the reception interrupt processing (S4008), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the reception buffer of the RAM 94 (S4101).

[1 ms timer interrupt process] The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is executed every time an interrupt pulse of 1 msec cycle is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 59, in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, the input process (S4201) is performed. In the input process (S4201), switch data (edge data and level data) is created based on detection signals from the effect button detection switch 63a (see FIG. 10) and the select button detection switch 64a (see FIG. 10).

Then, a lamp data output process (S4202) is performed. In the lamp data output process (S4202), the lamp data created in the other process (S4304) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is transmitted to the sub-driving substrate 107 in order to cause the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 to emit light at a timing suitable for the effect. Output. That is, the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 are caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the lamp data.

Next, drive control processing (S4203) is performed. In the drive control process (S4203), drive data (data for driving the panel movable body drive motor 15a) is created or output in order to drive the panel movable body 15 at a timing suitable for the performance. That is, the board movable body 15 is driven in a predetermined operation mode in accordance with the drive data.

Then, the watchdog timer process (S4204) for resetting the watchdog timer is performed, and the process is finished.

[10 ms Timer Interrupt Processing] The 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010) is executed each time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub control board 90. As shown in FIG. 60, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process described later is performed (S4301). Next, a switch state acquisition process of storing the switch data created by the 1 ms timer interrupt process in the RAM 94 as the switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process is performed (S4302). Subsequently, a switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data stored in the switch state acquisition process (S4302) is performed (S4303).

After that, the production control microcomputer 91 creates lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and audio data (data for controlling the output of audio from the speaker 67) and audio. Other processing such as outputting to the control board 106 and updating various effect determination random numbers is executed (S4304), and this processing ends.

[Reception Command Analysis Process] As shown in FIG. 61, in the reception command analysis process (S4301), the effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a variation start command is received from the main control board 80 (S4401), If it has been received, variation effect start processing is performed (S4402). In the fluctuating effect start process (S4402), the fluctuating start command is analyzed, and the fluctuating effect pattern is selected based on the analysis result. In addition, the production design as the stop design and the notice production are selected. Then, the fluctuation effect start command for starting the fluctuation effect with the selected effect contents is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and if it has received the fluctuation effect end processing (S4404). In the fluctuation effect ending process (S4404), the fluctuation stop command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the fluctuation effect ending command for ending the fluctuation effect is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and if it has received the opening effect selection process (S4406). In the opening effect selection process (S4406), the opening command is analyzed, and the pattern (content) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected based on the analysis result. Then, an opening effect start command for starting the opening effect with the selected opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407), and if it has received, performs a round effect selection process (S4408). In the round effect selection processing (S4408), the round designation command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the pattern (content) of the round effect to be executed during the round game of the jackpot game is selected. Then, a round effect start command for starting the round effect with the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command is received from the main control board 80 (S4409), and if it is received, the ending effect selection processing is performed (S4410). In the ending effect selection process (S4410), the ending command is analyzed, and based on the analysis result, the ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an ending effect start command for starting the ending effect with the selected ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the special memory clear command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4411), and if it has received the special memory clear notification process (S4412). In the special memory clear notifying process (S4412), a special memory clear notifying command for notifying that the contents stored in the special memory 89 have been erased is set in the output buffer of the RAM 94. As a result, when the special memory clear notification command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays " A clear image CL1 indicating the character "Special memory has been cleared" is displayed. At this time, a special sound indicating that the stored contents of the special memory 89 has been erased is output from the speaker 67. In this way, it is possible to easily recognize that the storage content of the special memory 89 has been erased, that is, the output rate has been initialized. The notification mode indicating that the stored contents of the special memory 89 have been erased can be changed as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a clear image CL2 indicating the characters "The output rate has been initialized" is displayed on the display screen 7a, or a predetermined lamp (frame lamp 66 or panel lamp 5) is displayed. The light may be emitted in a special light emitting mode.

In step S4413, as other processing, processing based on a received command other than the above-mentioned commands (for example, processing for performing V-pass notification based on a V-pass command indicating passage to the specific area 39) is performed. Then, the received command analysis processing (S4301) ends.

10. Effects of this Embodiment As described in detail above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment (first embodiment), the proportion display 300 is displayed by the control processing of the main control board 80 as shown in FIG. It is possible to display the percentage. That is, the proportion is not displayed by the main control board 80 that performs the main game control, and the proportion is not displayed by the sub control board 90, for example. Therefore, it is possible to make a person who confirms (examines) the output rate grasp the output rate as reliable information. As a result, it is possible to correctly determine whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been tampered with, or the proportion is abnormal due to a malfunction or failure.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the game display 40 and the display on the proportion display 300 are selectively performed. This makes it possible to prevent the display control by the game control microcomputer 81 from becoming complicated. The display condition for displaying the output ratio on the output ratio display 300 is that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and is in a customer waiting state. Therefore, when the gaming machine frame 50 is open, even if the gaming ball enters the starting ports 20 and 21 and the variable display of the special symbol starts, the display condition is not satisfied. Therefore, in the above case, the game display 40 displays the game information (special symbol, etc.) relating to the progress of the game, and prevents the display of the game information from being lost even though the game is being played. It is possible.

11. Modification Example Hereinafter, a modification example will be described. In addition, in the description of the modified example, the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a modified example of the first embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 63 to 73. In the said 1st form, it comprised so that the output ratio could be displayed on the output display 300. On the other hand, the modification of the first embodiment is configured such that the base can be displayed on the base display. The base (specific ratio value) is the ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of balls (the total number of balls, the number of specific game balls) that is the number of game balls that the player has shot. is there. The base indicator for displaying the base is composed of four consecutive 7-segments, and has the same hardware configuration as the above-mentioned output indicator 300 (see FIG. 8). Therefore, hereinafter, it will be referred to as a "base display (specific display) 300". The number of shot balls is a denominator value (denominator measurement value) before the base is calculated, and the total prize ball number is a numerator value (numerator measurement value) before the base is calculated.

In order to calculate the base, it is necessary to count the number of shot balls. Here, in this embodiment, all the entrances (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first big winning opening 30, second big winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27) provided in the game area 3 , The number of game balls that entered the outlet 16) is counted. The number of game balls counted by this is considered as the number of shot balls. However, in the first embodiment described above, a sensor for detecting a game ball that has entered the outlet 16 is not provided.

Therefore, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 63, the out-port sensor 16a is arranged in the out-port discharge path HK extending from the out-port 16 to the outside of the game area 3. The out mouth sensor 16a detects a game ball that has entered the out mouth 16. The game balls that enter the first starting opening 20, the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, the second big winning opening 35, or the normal winning opening 27 do not pass through the out opening sensor 16a, It is designed to be discharged to the outside of the game area 3. That is, the outlet sensor 16a of this modified example detects a game ball that has not won any of the winning openings. As shown in FIG. 64, the main control board 80 is connected to the outlet sensor 16a via a relay board 88. Therefore, the detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a is input to the game control microcomputer 81.

Here, in order to count the number of shot balls, a method of providing a sensor for detecting the game balls shot toward the game area 3 near the rail member 4 (see FIG. 1) can be considered. However, in this method, the sensor may detect a game ball that has been fired, and then the game ball that has returned due to weak momentum may be detected again and there is a possibility that an accurate number of fired balls cannot be counted. Therefore, in this modified example, by counting all the game balls discharged out of the game area 3, it is possible to count the number of shot balls as accurately as possible.

By the way, in a pachinko game machine, a test firing test of the base (ball output rate) is performed before installing the hall. In the 1-hour test shooting test, it is inspected that the base is not more than 3 (300%). In the 10-hour test shooting test, it is inspected that the base exceeds 0.5 (50%) and is not 2 (200%) or more. However, in the past, it was not possible to completely deny the possibility that the base was out of the normal range due to improper modification after the inspection or due to a failure or a defect. Therefore, in this modified example, the base can be displayed on the base display 300.

In this modification, there are three types of bases. In the base in the normal game state (non-time saving state), in the time saving state (high probability state and time saving state, or in the low probability state and time saving state), in the jackpot game state (from the start to the end of the jackpot game) Is the base of. The base in the normal game state is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the normal game state. The base in the time saving state is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the time saving state. The base in the jackpot gaming state is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of shot balls counted only in the jackpot gaming state. By thus confirming each base divided for each gaming state, it is possible to more accurately determine the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as compared with the case where only the bases for all gaming states can be confirmed.

Next, the display on the base display 300 will be described. In the first lighting region 310, the base in the normal game state (hereinafter referred to as “normal base”) or the base in the short-time state (hereinafter referred to as “time-short base”) is displayed as a percentage (percentage). Display the number of place. However, it is almost impossible for the normal base and the time saving base to exceed 1 (100%), but the base in the jackpot gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot base (ball-out rate)") will almost exceed 1. Become. Therefore, in the first lighting region 310, the hundreds position when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage is displayed.

In the second lighting region 320, the ones digit is displayed when the normal base or the time saving base is displayed as a percentage, whereas the tens digit is displayed when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage. In this modification, the base indicator 300 does not display the ones digit when the jackpot base is displayed as a percentage. This is because it is almost meaningless to confirm up to the third significant digit of the jackpot base.

In the third lighting region 330, the base displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 is a normal base, a time saving base, or a jackpot base. In this modified example, when the normal base is displayed, “1” is displayed in the third lighting area 330. Further, when the time saving base is displayed, “2” is displayed in the third lighting area 330. When the jackpot base is displayed, “3” is displayed in the third lighting area 330.

The fourth lighting region 340 is configured to indicate whether the base displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 is an effective value or a reference value. The meaning of the effective value or the reference value is to indicate whether or not the base has a converged value to some extent, like the meaning of the first embodiment. In this modified example, the total number of shot balls from the power being turned on to the present time (the total number of shot balls in the normal gaming state, the number of shot balls in the time saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state) is “100,000”. Any of the first condition that the number of fluctuations is greater than or equal to the number of times that the special symbol fluctuation display has been executed since the power was turned on until the present time is "3000" (predetermined number of revolutions) or more. If the above condition is satisfied, the base is considered to have converged to some extent (effective value). On the contrary, if neither the above-mentioned first condition nor the above-mentioned second condition is satisfied, it is considered that the base has not converged to some extent (reference value).

As shown in FIG. 65C, the special memory 89 of the modified example is a dedicated memory for storing the processing information for calculating the base. Specifically, the special memory 89 has a normal 100 ball counter, a normal shot ball number counter, a normal total prize ball number counter, a normal base storage area, a time saving 100 ball counter, a time saving shot ball number counter, and a time saving total prize ball number. A counter, a time saving base storage area, a jackpot 100 ball counter, a jackpot launch ball number counter, a jackpot total prize ball number counter, a jackpot base storage area, a variation count counter, and a checksum storage area are provided. The special memory 89 of the modified example is a volatile storage means (DRAM) that cannot hold the stored contents when the power is not supplied, like the special memory 89 of the first embodiment. However, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on as in the first embodiment.

The normal 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of balls fired by the player in the normal game state, one by one, and is reset to "0" when 100 balls are counted. Has become. The normal firing ball number counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the normal 100-ball counter. The normal 100-ball counter and the normal launch ball number counter measure the number of launch balls in the normal game state from the time the power is turned on to the present time as one hundred-ball unit (hundred-ball measuring means). Is. In this way, by calculating the normal base using the normal 100-ball counter and the normal firing ball number counter, it is possible to simplify the software processing at the time of division, as described in the first embodiment. At the same time, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. The normal total prize ball number counter counts the total number of prize balls in the normal game state from the moment the power is turned on to the present time. The normal base storage area stores the calculated normal base.

The time saving 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of balls fired by the player in the time-saving state one by one, and is reset to "0" when 100 balls are counted. ing. The time saving firing ball number counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the time saving 100 ball counter. The hour-shortening 100-ball counter and the hour-shortening ball-counting counter measure the number of balls to be launched in the hour-shortening state from the moment the power is turned on to the present time as one hundred-ball unit (hundred-ball measuring means). is there. By calculating the time saving base using the time saving 100 ball counter and the time saving firing ball number counter in this way, it is possible to simplify the software process at the time of division, as described in the first embodiment. At the same time, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. The time saving total prize ball number counter counts the total number of prize balls in the time saving state from when the power is turned on to the present time. The time saving base storage area stores the calculated time saving base.

The jackpot 100-ball counter (first counter) counts the number of balls shot by the player in the jackpot game state one by one, and is reset to a value of "0" when 100 balls are counted. Has become. The jackpot firing ball number counter (second counter) counts one when 100 balls are counted by the jackpot 100-ball counter. The jackpot 100-ball counter and the jackpot launch ball number counter measure the number of launch balls in the jackpot gaming state from the moment the power is turned on to the present time as one hundred-ball unit (hundred-ball measuring means). Is. In this way, the jackpot base is calculated by using the jackpot 100-ball counter and the jackpot launch counter, so that the software process at the time of division can be simplified as described in the first embodiment. At the same time, it is possible to omit the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. The jackpot total prize ball number counter counts the total number of prize balls in the jackpot gaming state from the moment the power is turned on to the present time. The jackpot base storage area stores the calculated jackpot base. Since the variation counter and the checksum storage area are the same as those in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

[Input Processing] In the input processing (S101) of the modified example shown in FIG. 66, step S150 is provided instead of step S111 in the input processing (S101) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 45, and replaced with step S117. Step S152 is provided, and Steps S153 to S157 are provided instead of Steps S119 to S121. As shown in FIG. 66, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signal from each sensor in step S110, and then determines in step S150 whether or not it is a ball entry detection signal. That is, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 20a, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 21a, the detection signal from the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the detection signal from the second big winning opening sensor 35a, and the normal winning opening sensor 27a. It is determined whether or not it is a detection signal or a detection signal from the out-port sensor 16a. If it is a ball-in detection signal (YES in S150), after steps S112 and S113, a counter addition process described later is executed (S151). However, in this modified example, in the case of the detection signal from the out-port sensor 16a, the prize ball command is not set in step S113. Then, if the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (YES in S115) and is in the customer waiting state (YES in S116), base calculation processing described later is executed (S152).

If it is determined in step S118 that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S153. In step S153, it is determined whether or not the display flag at present is "1". The display flag of the modified example indicates a value of "1", "2", or "3". If the display flag is "1" (YES in S153), the display flag is switched to "2" (S154), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if it is not "1" (NO in S153), then it is determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S155). If it is "2" (YES in S155), the display flag is switched to "3" (S156), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, if it is not "2" (NO in S155), it means "3", the display flag is switched to "1" (S157), and this processing is finished.

In this modified example, when the base is displayed, the normal base is displayed when the display flag is “1” and the time saving base is displayed when the display flag is “2”, as will be described later. If the flag is "3", the jackpot base is displayed. Therefore, each time a person who confirms the base operates the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to switch between the normal base display, the time saving base display, and the jackpot base display.

[Counter Addition Process] As shown in FIG. 67, in the counter addition process (S151), first, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal game state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) (S160). That is, it is determined whether or not the high accuracy flag indicating the high probability state is OFF and the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is OFF. If it is in the normal gaming state (YES in S160), the value of the normal 100-ball counter is incremented by "1" (S161). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal 100-ball counter has become "100" or more (S162). If it is less than "100" (NO in S162), the process proceeds to step S165. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S162), the value of the normal firing ball number counter is incremented by "1" (S163), and the value of the normal 100-ball counter is decremented by "100" ( S164), and proceeds to step S165. In this way, it is possible to measure the number of shot balls in the normal game state as one in hundreds.

In step S165, it is determined whether or not the ball is entering the outlet 16. That is, it is determined whether or not the incoming ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 is a detection signal from the out-port sensor 16a. If it is a ball entering the out-port 16 (YES in S165), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the ball is not in the out mouth (NO in S165), the winning mouth (first starting mouth 20, second starting mouth 21, first big winning mouth 30, second big winning mouth 35, normal winning mouth 27) ) Will be a prize. In this case, the value of the normal total prize ball counter is added based on the type of the ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. 65(A). (S166), and this processing ends. For example, in the normal gaming state, if the prize is the normal winning opening 27, the value of the normal total prize ball counter is incremented by "8".

If it is determined in step S160 that the game is not in the normal gaming state, then it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (high probability probability state and time saving state, or normal probability state and time saving state) (S167). That is, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If it is in the time saving state (YES in S167), the value of the time saving 100 ball counter is incremented by "1" (S168). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving 100 ball counter is equal to or more than "100" (S169). If it is less than "100" (NO in S169), the process proceeds to step S172. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S169), the value of the hourly firing ball number counter is incremented by "1" (S170), and the value of the hourly 100-ball counter is decremented by "100" ( S171), and proceeds to step S172. In this way, it is possible to count the number of shot balls in the time-saving state as one in hundreds.

In step S172, it is determined whether or not it is a ball entering the outlet 16. That is, it is determined whether or not the incoming ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 is a detection signal from the out-port sensor 16a. If the ball is entering the out-port 16 (YES in S172), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is not a ball entering the out mouth (NO in S172), based on the type of ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. 65(A). Then, the value of the time saving total prize ball number counter is added (S173), and this processing ends. For example, in the time saving state, in the case of winning the ordinary winning opening 27, the value of the time saving total prize ball counter is incremented by "8".

If it is determined in step S167 that it is not in the time saving state, it means that the jackpot is in the gaming state, and the process proceeds to step S174. In step S174, the value of the jackpot 100-ball counter is incremented by "1". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot 100-ball counter is 100 or more (S175). If it is less than "100" (NO in S175), the process proceeds to step S178. On the other hand, if it is "100" or more (YES in S175), the value of the jackpot firing number counter is incremented by "1" (S176), and the value of the jackpot 100-ball counter is decremented by "100" ( S177), and proceeds to step S178. In this way, it is possible to measure the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state as one in hundreds of balls.

In step S178, it is determined whether or not the ball is entering the outlet 16. That is, it is determined whether or not the incoming ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 is a detection signal from the out-port sensor 16a. If it is a ball entering the out-port 16 (YES in S178), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is not a ball entering the out mouth (NO in S178), based on the type of ball detection signal read in step S110 of FIG. 66 and the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. 65(A). Then, the value of the jackpot total prize ball number counter is added (S179), and this processing is finished. For example, in the jackpot gaming state, if the first big winning hole 30 is a prize, the value of the jackpot total prize ball counter is incremented by "15".

[Base Calculation Processing] As shown in FIG. 68, in the base calculation processing (S152, specific calculation processing), it is first determined whether or not it is in the normal game state (normal probability state and non-time saving state) (S180). If it is in the normal game state (YES in S180), it is determined whether or not the value of the normal firing ball number counter is "1" or more (S181). If it is "1" or more (YES in S181), normal base arithmetic processing is executed (S182). Specifically, the value of the normal total prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the normal shot ball number counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the normal base as a percentage value without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In addition, in the calculated normal base, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the normal base is stored in the normal base storage area of the special memory 89 (see FIG. 65C) (S183), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in step S181, if the value of the normal firing ball number counter is not "1" or more, it means "0", and the normal base cannot be calculated, so this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S180 that the game is not in the normal game state, then it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (high probability probability state and time saving state, or normal probability state and time saving state) (S184). If it is in the time saving state (YES in S184), it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving firing number counter is "1" or more (S185). If it is "1" or more (YES in S185), the time saving base arithmetic processing is executed (S186). Specifically, the value of the time saving total prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the time saving firing ball number counter. As a result, it is possible to easily calculate the time saving base as a percentage value without performing the multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In the calculated time saving base, the value of the first decimal place is rounded off. Then, the value of the time saving base is stored in the time saving base storage area of the special memory 89 (see FIG. 65(C)) (S187), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in step S185, if the value of the hour-and-short firing number counter is not "1" or more, it is "0", and the hour-and-short base cannot be calculated, so this processing ends.

If it is determined in step S184 that it is not in the time saving state, it means that it is in the jackpot gaming state, and the process proceeds to step S188. In step S188, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot firing number counter is "1" or more (S188). If it is "1" or more (YES in S188), the jackpot base calculation process is executed (S189). Specifically, the value of the jackpot total prize ball number counter is divided by the value of the jackpot launch ball number counter. This makes it possible to easily calculate the jackpot base as a percentage value without performing a multiplication process of multiplying by 100. In addition, on the calculated time saving basis, the value of the unit digit is rounded off. Then, the value of the jackpot base is stored in the jackpot base storage area of the special memory 89 (see FIG. 65(C)) (S190), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, in step S188, if the value of the jackpot firing number counter is not "1" or more, it is "0", and the jackpot base cannot be calculated, so this processing ends.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the modification shown in FIG. 69, step S2340 is provided instead of step S2304 in the output processing (S107) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, when the gaming machine frame is open (YES in S2301) and in the customer waiting state (YES in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 displays a base display process (specific display process) described later. ) Is executed (S2340). The base display process is a process for displaying the base on the base display 300.

[Base Display Processing] In the base display processing (S2340), first, as shown in FIG. 70, it is determined whether the common flag is “1” (S2601). The common flag indicates in which of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the base display 300 the lighting control is performed.

If the common flag is "1" (YES in S2601), the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is first output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2602). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2603) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the fourth lighting region 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[1000] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2604). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2605). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the first lighting area 310. Subsequently, it is determined whether the display flag is "1" (S2606). As described above, the display flag is switched to "1" or "2" or "3" by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 (see FIG. 66), and if it is "1", the normal base display is displayed. "2" indicates a time saving base display, and "3" indicates a jackpot base display.

If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2606), the data information D for displaying the tens digit of the normal base stored in the normal base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. [0...7] is output (S2607). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2606), it is subsequently determined whether the display flag is "2" (S2608). If the display flag is "2" (YES in S2608), the data information D for displaying the tens digit of the time saving base stored in the time saving base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. [0...7] is output (S2609). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "2" (NO in S2608), it means "3" and is stored in the jackpot base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D[0...7] for displaying the hundreds place of the jackpot base is output (S2610). After step S2607 or S2609 or S2610, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2511). Accordingly, it is possible to light the first lighting region 310 in the lighting manner to be displayed. Then, the common flag is switched to "2" (S2612), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "1" in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2621 as shown in FIG. 71, and it is determined whether the common flag is "2". If the common flag is "2" (YES in S2621), first, data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2622). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2623) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2624). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2625). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the second lighting area 320.

Then, it is determined whether the display flag is "1" (S2626). If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2626), the data information D for displaying the first digit of the normal base stored in the normal base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. [0...7] is output (S2627). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2626), it is subsequently determined whether or not the display flag is "2" (S2628). If the display flag is "2" (YES in S2628), the data information D for displaying the first digit of the time saving base stored in the time saving base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. [0...7] is output (S2629). On the other hand, if the display flag is not "2" (NO in S2628), it is "3" and is stored in the jackpot base storage area of the special memory 89 from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Data information D[0...7] for displaying the tens of the jackpot base is output (S2630). After step S2627, S2629 or S2630, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2531). Accordingly, it is possible to light the second lighting region 320 in the lighting manner to be displayed. Then, the common flag is switched to "3" (S2632), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "2" in step S2621, the process proceeds to step S2641 as shown in FIG. 72, and it is determined whether the common flag is "3". If the common flag is "3" (YES in S2641), the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is first output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2642). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2643) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2644). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2645). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the third lighting area 330.

Then, it is determined whether the display flag is "1" (S2646). If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2646), the data information D[0...7] for displaying "1" is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2647). That is, the data information D[0...7]=[01100000] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2651), “1” is displayed in the third lighting area 330. In this way, in the present embodiment, if “1” is displayed in the third lighting region 330, the person who confirms the base can use the two-digit number displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320. Make them understand that the numbers (base) are normal.

On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2646), then it is determined whether the display flag is "2" (S2648). If the display flag is "2" (YES in S2648), the data information D[0...7] for displaying "2" is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2549). That is, the data information D[0...7]=[11011010] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2651), “2” is displayed in the third lighting area 330. In this way, in the present embodiment, if “2” is displayed in the third lighting region 330, the person who confirms the base can use the two-digit number displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320. Make them understand that the numbers (base) are time-based.

On the other hand, in step S2648, if the display flag is not "2", it is "3". In this case, the data information D[0...7] for displaying "3" is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2650). That is, the data information D[0...7]=[11110010] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2651), “3” is displayed in the third lighting area 330. In this way, in the present embodiment, if “3” is displayed in the third lighting region 330, the person who confirms the base can use the two-digit number displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320. Make them understand that the numbers (base) are jackpot bases. After step S2651, the common flag is switched to "4" (S2652), and this processing ends.

If the common flag is not "3" in step S2641, the common flag is "4", and the process proceeds to step S2661 as shown in FIG. In step S2661, the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2662) (see FIG. 17). As a result, the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Next, the data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2663). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the "H" level (S2664). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the fourth lighting area 340.

Next, the total number of shot balls since the power was turned on until the present time (the total of the number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the time saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state (specific measurement value) ) Is "100000" or more. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the short-time firing ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot firing ball counter is "1000" or more. If the total number of fired balls is "100000" or more (YES in S2665), the process proceeds to step S2666. On the other hand, if the number of shots is "100000" or more (NO in S2665), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter of the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (S2667). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations since the first power-on of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has reached “3000”. If it is "3000" or more (YES in S2667), the process proceeds to step S2666. In step S2666, data information D[0...7] for displaying "1" is output. That is, the data information D[0...7]=D[01100000] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2669), “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340. In this way, in the present embodiment, if "1" is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, it is effective that the base being displayed (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) has converged to a person who confirms the base to some extent. Let them know that it is a value.

On the other hand, if the total number of fired balls is less than “100000” (NO in S2665) and the value of the variation counter is less than “3000” (NO in S2667), the process proceeds to step S2668. In step S2668, data information D[0...7] for displaying "0" is output. That is, the data information D[0...7]=[11111100] is output. Then, when the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2669), “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340. In this way, in the present embodiment, if “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting area 340, the person who confirms the base is still converging on the displayed base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base). Make them understand that it is a reference value that may not exist. After step S2669, the common flag is switched to "1" (S2670), and this processing ends.

As described above, according to the modified example of the first embodiment, it is possible to confirm the base on the base display 300. Especially, you can check the base for each gaming state like normal base (base in normal gaming state), time saving base (base in time saving state) and jackpot base (base in jackpot playing state). Therefore, it is possible to correctly determine the abnormality of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the base. If it is a normal base, for example, if it is in the range of 30% to 39%, it may be judged to be within the normal range, and if it is a time saving base, it may be judged to be in the normal range if it is in the range of 84% to 99%. Good, if it is a jackpot base, for example, if it is in the range of 600% to 800%, it may be determined as within the normal range. The operational effects of the other modified examples are the same as the operational effects of the first embodiment described above except that the output rate is changed to the base, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the first embodiment described above, when the stored contents of the special memory 89 are erased, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a clear image showing the characters "Special memory has been cleared" on the display screen 7a. CL1 is displayed. On the other hand, in the modified example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62C, for example, a clear image CL3 indicating the characters "The base has been initialized" may be displayed on the display screen 7a. good. At this time, a special sound indicating that the base has been initialized may be output from the speaker 67. Alternatively, a predetermined lamp (frame lamp 66 or board lamp 5) may be caused to emit light in a special light emitting mode.

<Second form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 74 to 77. The special memory 89 of the first embodiment is a volatile storage means (DRAM). On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the special memory 89A is a non-volatile storage means (EEPROM). The special memory 89A may be a non-volatile storage means other than the EEPROM, and may be, for example, a flash memory. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the special memory 89A of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74(B), a storage area for 100 balls, an actual total prize ball count storage area, a prize prize ball count storage area, and a continuous prize prize ball. A number storage area and a fluctuation number storage area are provided. The 100-ball storage area stores the value of the 100-ball counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The actual total prize ball number storage area stores the value of the actual total prize ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The character prize ball number storage area stores the value of the character prize ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The continuous character prize ball number storage area stores the value of the continuous character prize ball counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The fluctuation frequency storage area stores the value of the fluctuation frequency counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The reason for storing each of these values (hereinafter, referred to as “measured value for displaying rate”) in the special memory 89A is based on the following reasons.

As described above, the backup power can be supplied from the backup power supply circuit 151 to the special memory 89 (volatile storage means) of the first embodiment. The stored memory contents can be retained. However, it is conceivable that even the backup power supply cannot be supplied to the special memory 89 and the stored contents of the special memory 89 are erased due to disconnection, poor contact, or the like. In addition, the power plug 160 (see FIG. 7) may be intentionally pulled out to cause the power to be cut off for several days, which may cause the contents stored in the special memory 89 to be erased.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, in order to deal with the above-mentioned problem, a special memory (nonvolatile memory) 89A which is a non-volatile storage means is provided so that the measured value for displaying the proportion is stored in the special memory 89A when the power is cut off. I have to. As a result, even if the backup power is not supplied, it is possible to avoid erasing the stored contents (measured value for displaying ratio) of the special memory 89A. Thus, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to restart the measurement from the output rate display measurement value stored immediately before the power failure.

Here, a method of directly storing (storing) in the special memory 89A each time the measurement value for displaying the proportion is measured can be considered. However, in the case of this method, the special memory 89A, which is a non-volatile storage unit, is frequently accessed, and the special memory 89A deteriorates quickly. That is, the non-volatile storage unit cannot support high-frequency reading and writing as does the volatile storage unit.

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a game RAM (volatile memory) 84A, which is a volatile storage unit, has a 100-ball counter, an actual total prize ball number counter, and a prize prize ball number. A counter, a continuous prize prize ball number counter, a variation counter, a character ratio storage area, and a continuous character ratio storage area are provided. As a result, in a normal time (when the monitored voltage is higher than 17V) in which no power interruption occurs, the gaming RAM 84A is accessed even if the proportion display measurement value is measured. It does not access the memory 89A. Therefore, the frequency of use (deterioration) of the special memory 89A can be suppressed.

Then, only when the power is cut off, the measured value for displaying the ratio measured up to that time is transferred (copied) to the special memory 89A. That is, the value of the 100-ball counter of the game RAM 84A, the value of the actual total prize ball number counter, the value of the accessory prize ball number counter, the value of the continuous prize prize ball number counter, and the value of the number of fluctuations counter. And are stored in the storage area for 100 balls, the actual total award ball number storage area, the award prize ball number storage area, the continuous award ball number storage area, and the variation count storage area of the special memory 89A, respectively. This makes it possible to prevent the measured value for displaying the proportion from being erased even if an abnormal situation such as a disconnection, a poor contact, or an intentional power failure occurs for several days.

When all the contents stored in the game RAM 84A are cleared when the power is subsequently turned on (when the power is restored), the proportion display measurement values stored in the special memory 89A are transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. It has become. That is, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement from the rate display measurement value stored when the power was cut off. On the other hand, if the stored contents of the game RAM 84A is not cleared when the power is turned on, the percentage display measurement value (the value of the counter for 100 balls, the value of the actual total prize ball number counter, the accessory) stored in the game RAM 84A is not cleared. The value of the prize ball number counter, the value of the continuous prize prize ball number counter, the value of the number of fluctuations), and the ratio display measurement value (stored in the storage area for 100 balls) stored in the special memory 89A. The value, the value stored in the award prize ball number storage area, the value stored in the continuous award prize ball number storage area, and the value stored in the variation number storage area) are compared.

If the results of the above collation match, it is determined that the proportion display measurement value stored in the gaming RAM 84A is normal, and the measurement is restarted from the proportion display measurement value. On the other hand, if the results of the above-mentioned collation do not match, it is judged that the proportion display measurement value stored in the gaming RAM 84A is abnormal, and the proportion display value stored in the special memory 89A is displayed. The measured value for use is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the ratio display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A that is more likely to be normal. As described above, when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement while checking whether the proportion display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal.

[Power-on Processing] In the power-on processing (S001) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 75, instead of steps S021 to S024 of the power-on processing (S001) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 43, step S026, S027 is provided. As shown in FIG. 75, when the game control microcomputer 81 clears all the information stored in the game RAM 84A in step S018, the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S026 via steps S019 and S020. In step S026, the proportion display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A, and the flow proceeds to step S025. As a result, even if the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are erased when the power is turned on, the measurement can be restarted from the proportion display measurement value transferred to the special memory 89A when the power is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate as a converged value.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S015 that the checksum values in the gaming RAM 84A match, the process proceeds to steps S016 and S017 and then to step S027. In step S027, the proportion display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is compared with the proportion display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A. If the values of the respective proportion display measurement values match (YES in S027), it is determined that the proportion display measurement values stored in the game RAM 84A are normal, and the process does not proceed to step S026. Proceeds to step S025. On the other hand, if at least one of the proportion display measurement values does not match (NO in S027), it is determined that the proportion display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal. The transfer rate display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A is transferred to the game RAM 84A (S026). As described above, it is possible to determine whether or not to use the proportion display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A by the double check of the check sum of the gaming RAM 84A and the proportion display measurement value. Is.

[Award Ball Number Counter Addition Process] In the second type award ball number counter addition process (S114) shown in FIG. 76, steps S201 to S204 of the first type award ball number counter addition process (S114) shown in FIG. Steps S210 to S213, S215, S216, and S218 are provided instead of S206, S207, and S209. The steps S201 to S204, S206, S207, and S209 of the first mode are processes relating to the respective counters (see FIG. 11C) provided in the special memory 89, while the steps S210 to S213 of the second mode are. S215, S216, and S218 are processes relating to each counter (see FIG. 74A) provided in the game RAM 84A. Since only the above points are changed with respect to the award ball number counter addition processing (S114) of the first embodiment, detailed description will be omitted.

[Power Cutoff Monitoring Process] In the power cutoff monitoring process (S108) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 77, step S2908 is performed instead of steps S2904 and S2905 of the power cutoff monitoring process (S108) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. It is provided. As shown in FIG. 77, if the power-off signal is input in step S2901 (YES in S2901), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S2908 via steps S2902 and S2903. In step S2908, the proportion display measurement value measured by the respective counters provided in the game RAM 84A until the power is cut off is transferred (copied) to each storage area (see FIG. 74(B)) provided in the special memory 89A. ) Let me. In this way, when the power is cut off, the measured value for displaying the proportion is held in the special memory 89A.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, by storing the measured value for displaying the proportion in the special memory 89A which is a non-volatile storage means when the power is cut off, the backup power supply is not supplied. However, it is possible to avoid erasing the measured value for displaying the ratio. Then, when the power is turned on thereafter, it is possible to transfer the proportion display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A at the previous power interruption to the gaming RAM 84A which is a volatile storage means. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the same value as the measured value for displaying the output ratio, which was stored when the power was cut off.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the second embodiment, during normal times when no power interruption occurs, the measured proportion display measurement value is stored in the gaming RAM 84A which is a volatile storage unit, and the power interruption occurs. Only for a certain time, the measured value for displaying the ratio is stored (shifted) in the special memory 89A which is a non-volatile storage means. Therefore, since the special memory 89A is not frequently accessed, while the frequency of use (deterioration) of the special memory 89A is suppressed, disconnection, contact failure, or intentional power outage for several days causes abnormal display. It is possible to prevent the measurement value for use from being erased. The other operational effects of the second mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first mode, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a modified example of the second embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 78 and 79. In the second embodiment, each value (measured value for displaying the output rate) measured for calculating the output rate at the time of power interruption is stored in the special memory 89A which is a non-volatile storage unit. On the other hand, in the modified example of the second embodiment, each value (measurement value for base display) measured for calculating the base at the time of power interruption is stored in the special memory 89A which is a non-volatile storage means. It is designed to let you.

In the special memory 89A of the modified example of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a storage area for 100 normal balls, a storage area for normal shot balls, a storage area for normal total prize balls, and a time saving time of 100 Storage area for balls, storage area for number of short-term shot balls, storage area for total number of short-term prize balls, storage area for jackpot 100 balls, storage area for jackpot launch balls, storage area for jackpot total prize balls, number of fluctuations A storage area is provided.

The normal 100-ball storage area stores the value of the normal 100-ball counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The normal firing ball number storage area stores the value of the normal firing ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The normal total prize ball number storage area stores the value of the normal total prize ball number counter that has been measured by the time of the power interruption. The memory area for 100 hour/hour balls stores the value of the counter for 100 hour/hour balls that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The hourly short-fired ball number storage area stores the value of the hourly short-fired ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The time saving total prize ball number storage area stores the value of the time saving total prize ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The jackpot 100-ball storage area stores the value of the jackpot 100-ball counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The jackpot launch ball number storage area stores the value of the jackpot launch ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The jackpot total prize ball number storage area stores the value of the jackpot total prize ball number counter that has been measured by the time of power interruption. The number-of-changes storage area stores the value of the number-of-changes counter measured up to the time of power interruption, as in the second embodiment. Storing each of these values (hereinafter referred to as "base display measurement value") in the special memory 89A is the same as the reason why the proportion display measurement value is stored in the special memory 89A in the second embodiment. Therefore, the description will be appropriately omitted.

In the modified example of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a game RAM (volatile memory) 84A which is a volatile storage means has a normal 100-ball counter, a normal shot-ball number counter, and a normal total ball count. Award ball number counter, normal base storage area, 100 hour/hour ball counter, hour/short firing ball number counter, hour/short total prize ball number counter, hour/short base memory area, jackpot 100 ball counter, jackpot launch ball number counter, jackpot total prize ball A number counter, a jackpot base storage area, and a variation counter are provided. As a result, in a normal time (when the monitored voltage is higher than 17V) in which no power interruption occurs, the game RAM 84A is accessed even if the base display measurement value is measured, and the special memory is used. It does not access 89A. Therefore, the frequency of use (deterioration) of the special memory 89A can be suppressed.

Then, only when the power is cut off, the base display measurement value measured up to that point is transferred (copied) to the special memory 89A. That is, the value of the normal 100 ball counter of the game RAM 84A, the value of the normal shot ball number counter, the value of the normal total prize ball number counter, the value of the hour/hour 100 ball counter, and the value of the hour/short shot ball number counter. The special memory stores the value of the time saving total prize ball number counter, the value of the jackpot 100 ball counter, the value of the jackpot launch ball number counter, the value of the jackpot total prize ball number counter, and the value of the variation count counter. 89A normal 100 ball storage area, normal firing ball number storage area, normal total award ball number storage area, 100 hour saving time storage area, time saving firing ball number storage area, time saving total award ball number storage area, jackpot 100 balls It is stored in the storage area, the large hitting ball number storage area, the big hit total prize ball number storage area, and the variation count storage area, respectively. As a result, it is possible to prevent the measured value for base display from being erased even if an abnormal situation occurs such as disconnection, poor contact, or intentional power failure for several days.

When all the contents stored in the game RAM 84A are cleared when the power is subsequently turned on (when the power is restored), the base display measurement values stored in the special memory 89A are transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. Is becoming That is, even if the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement from the base display measurement value stored when the power was cut off. On the other hand, if the stored contents of the game RAM 84A are not cleared when the power is turned on, the base display measured value stored in the game RAM 84A is compared with the base display measured value stored in the special memory 89A.

If the results of the above-mentioned collation match, it is determined that the base display measurement value stored in the gaming RAM 84A is normal, and the measurement is restarted from the base display measurement value. On the other hand, if the results of the above collation do not match, it is determined that the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is abnormal, and the ratio display display value stored in the special memory 89A is used. The measured value is transferred (copied) to the game RAM 84A. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A that is more likely to be normal. As described above, when the power is turned on, it is possible to restart the measurement while checking whether or not the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is normal.

[Power-on Process] In the power-on process (S001) of the modification of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 79, step S027 is replaced with the power-on process (S001) of the second form shown in FIG. Step S028 is provided. If it is determined in step S015 that the checksum values of the gaming RAM 84A match, the process proceeds to step S028 via steps S016 and S017. In step S028, the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is compared with the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A. If the values of the respective base display measurement values match (YES in S028), it is determined that the proportion display measurement value stored in the gaming RAM 84A is normal, and the process proceeds to step S026 Proceed to S025. On the other hand, if even one of the base display measurement values does not match (NO in S028), the base display measurement value stored in the game RAM 84A is determined to be abnormal, and The base display measurement value stored in the memory 89A is transferred to the game RAM 84A (S026). As described above, it is possible to determine whether to use the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A by the double check of the check sum of the game RAM 84A and the base display measurement value. ..

In the modification of the first embodiment, the counter addition process (S151) shown in FIG. 67 is executed as the process of adding the counters provided in the special memory 89. On the other hand, in the modification of the second embodiment, substantially the same processing as the counter addition processing (S151) shown in FIG. 67 is executed as the processing of adding each counter provided in the game RAM 84A. ing. Further, in the power supply monitoring process (S108) of the second embodiment, in step S2908, the proportion display measurement value is transferred (copied) to each storage area provided in the special memory 89A. On the other hand, in the power-off monitoring process (S108) of the modification of the second embodiment, the base display measurement value is transferred to each storage area provided in the special memory 89A instead of the process of step S2908 described above. It is like this.

As described above, according to the modified example of the second embodiment, by storing the base display measurement value in the special memory 89A, which is a non-volatile storage unit at the time of power interruption, even if the backup power is not supplied, It is possible to prevent the measurement value for base display from being erased. Then, when the power is turned on thereafter, the base display measurement value stored in the special memory 89A at the previous power interruption can be transferred to the game RAM 84A which is a volatile storage means. As a result, it is possible to restart the measurement from the same value as the base display measurement value stored when the power was cut off. The operational effects of the other modified examples are the same as the operational effects of the second embodiment described above except that the output rate is changed to the base, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Third form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described based on FIG. 67. The output indicator 300 of the first embodiment is arranged on the main control board 80, as shown in FIG. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the proportion indicator 300 is arranged in the rear case 401A of the main board case 400A as shown in FIG. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 80(A), the third aspect ratio indicator 300 is integrally attached to the lower left portion of the rear case 401A and is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC1. ing. Therefore, similar to the first embodiment, the lighting control of the proportion display device 300 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81. Here, as shown in FIG. 80(A), the output indicator 300 of the third embodiment is arranged in parallel with the mounting surface (rear surface) 80a of the main control board 80 and faces the integrated circuit IC9 at the facing position. It is in. Therefore, the ratio indicator 300 obstructs the visibility of the lower left part of the mounting surface 80a, and it is particularly difficult to confirm the product number of the integrated circuit IC. The mounting surface 80a is a plate surface of the main control board 80 on which a large number of integrated circuits such as the game control microcomputer 81 and the integrated circuit IC9 are mounted.

Therefore, in the third embodiment, the rear case 401A to which the proportion indicator 300 is attached is configured to be movable. Specifically, the rear case 401A is rotatably supported on the left end of the front case 402A via a rotary pin P1. Further, the rear case 401A is rotatably supported at the lower part on the left end side via a rotary pin P2 on the lower part on the left end side of the front case 402A. As a result, the rear case 401A can rotate around the rotation axis Q1 extending in the up-down direction on the left end side, as shown in FIGS. 80(A) (B) (C). In other words, the ratio indicator 300 is rotatable so as to reduce the area facing the mounting surface 80a. When the rear case 401A is rotated to the position shown in FIG. 80C, the output indicator 300 is in a non-opposing position that does not oppose the entire mounting surface 80a. In the third embodiment, the rear case 401A and the rotating pins P1 and P2 correspond to the moving mechanism section.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80(A), (B), and (C), the proportion indicator 300 is moved with respect to the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80. You can Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a from being hidden by the proportion indicator 300. Further, by not disposing the proportion display device 300 on the main control board 80, it is necessary to secure the space for disposing the proportion display device 300 by bringing the components on the main control board 80 closer to each other as in the first embodiment. It is possible to solve a problem that does not happen.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the third embodiment, it is possible to easily realize a structure in which the lower left portion of the mounting surface 80a can be seen by the rotating mechanism using the rear case 401A and the rotating pins P1 and P2. Then, the proportion indicator 300 is rotated from a facing position (see FIG. 80(A)) facing the integrated circuit IC9 to a non-facing position (see FIG. 80(C)) not facing the entire mounting surface 80a. You can Therefore, the visibility of the integrated circuit IC9 can be ensured, and the visibility of all the integrated circuits mounted on the mounting surface 80a can be ensured. Since the other operational effects of the third mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first mode, description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a first modification example of the third mode will be described based on FIG. 81. As shown in FIG. 81(A), the output indicator 300 is attached to the lower left part of the rear case 401B of the main board case 400B and is connected to the main control board 80 via a flexible cable FC2. .. The rear case 401B is rotatably supported on the left end of the front case 402B via a rotation pin P3. Further, the rear case 401B is rotatably supported on the right end of the front case 402B via a rotation pin P4.

As a result, the rear case 401B can rotate around the rotation axis Q2 extending in the left-right direction on the upper end side, as shown in FIGS. 81(A) (B) (C). By rotating the rear case 401B, the output indicator 300 moves from the facing position facing the integrated circuit IC9 (see FIG. 81A) to the non-facing position not facing the entire mounting surface 80a (FIG. 81). (See (C)). In this first modification, the rear case 401A and the rotating pins P3, P4 correspond to the moving mechanism section. As described above, the third embodiment described above and the first modified example mainly differ from each other in the rotation direction of the rear cases 401A and 401B. Therefore, the operation and effect of the first modification is substantially the same as the operation and effect of the third embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a second modification of the third embodiment will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 82(A), the ratio indicator 300 is attached to the lower left part of the rear case 401C of the main board case 400C and is connected to the main control board 80 via a flexible cable FC3. .. The lower surface portion 401Ca of the rear side case 401C is placed on the upper side of the lower surface portion 402Ca of the front side case 402C and is slidable in the left-right direction.

However, the upper part of the left end surface of the rear case 401C is locked to the upper locking piece 402a provided on the upper left part of the front case 402C. The lower portion of the left end surface of the rear case 401C is locked by a lower locking piece 402b provided at the lower left portion of the front case 402C. Due to these locking, the lateral slide of the rear case 401C is restricted. On the other hand, when these locks are released, as shown in FIG. 82(B), the lower surface portion 401Ca of the rear case 401C can be slid leftward with respect to the lower surface portion 402Ca of the front case 402C. In the second modification, the rear case 401C and the front case 402C correspond to the moving mechanism section.

According to the second modification of the third embodiment, it is possible to easily realize a structure in which the lower left part of the mounting surface 80a can be seen by the slide mechanism using the rear case 401C and the front case 402C. Then, the output indicator 300 is moved leftward from a facing position (see FIG. 82A) facing the integrated circuit IC9 to a non-facing position (see FIG. 82B) not facing the entire mounting surface 80a. Can be slid. Therefore, the visibility of the integrated circuit IC9 can be ensured, and the visibility of all the integrated circuits mounted on the mounting surface 80a can be ensured. The other operational effects of the second modified example are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described third embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

Next, a third modification example of the third mode will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 83(A), the output indicator 300 is attached to the lower left part of the rear case 401D of the main board case 400D and is connected to the main control board 80 via a flexible cable FC4. .. The left end portion 401Da of the rear case 401D is fitted into the left end portion 402Da of the front case 402D in a concave-convex shape, and is slidable (sliding) in the vertical direction. Further, the right end portion 401Db of the rear case 401D is fitted in the right end portion 402Db of the front case 402D in an uneven shape, and is slidable in the vertical direction.

However, the lower surface of the left end portion 401Da of the rear side case 401D is locked to the left side locking piece 402c provided below the left end portion 402Da of the front side case 402D. Further, the lower surface of the right end portion 401Db of the rear case 401D is locked to a right side locking piece 402d provided below the right end portion 402Db of the front case 402D. Due to these engagements, the vertical sliding of the rear case 401D is restricted. On the other hand, if these locks are released, as shown in FIG. 83B, the left end portion 401Da and the right end portion 401Db of the rear case 401D are different from the left end portion 402Da and the right end portion 402Db of the front case 402D. It can slide up and down. In the third modification, the rear case 401D and the front case 402D correspond to the moving mechanism section. As described above, the second modified example and the third modified example described above mainly differ only in the sliding direction of the rear cases 401C and 401D. Therefore, the operation and effect of the third modification is substantially the same as the operation and effect of the second modification described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Note that the above-described third mode (see FIG. 80), the first modification of the third mode (see FIG. 81), the second modification of the third mode (see FIG. 82), and the third modification of the third mode. In the example (see FIG. 83), the output ratio indicator 300 is configured to be movable. However, instead of the proportion indicator 300, the base indicator 300 as described in the modification of the first embodiment or the modification of the second embodiment may be configured to be movable. The operational effect in this case is different from the operational effect of the above-described third embodiment or each modification thereof only in that the output rate is changed to a base, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Fourth form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 84 to 88. In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the ratio can be displayed on the ratio indicator 300 as a component of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84, the external proportion display device (external device) 900, which is not a component of the pachinko gaming machine 1, can display the proportion. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 84(A), the external output rate display device 900 includes a display unit 910, a changeover switch 920, a connection cable 930, and a connector CN4. The display unit 910 is configured by a so-called 4-unit 7-segment that has four lighting regions, similarly to the output ratio display 300 described above. The changeover switch 920 switches between the ON state and the OFF state of the external output ratio display device 900. The connection cable 930 is a flexible cable having a connector CN4 at one end and having a certain length to facilitate connection of the connector CN4. The connector CN4 connects to a connector CN3 provided on the main control board 80 described later.

In the fourth mode, a connector (connection portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80 is configured to output a proportion display signal to the external proportion display device 900. The proportion display signal is a signal for causing the external proportion display device 900 to display the proportion. The connector CN3 is a dedicated connector provided separately from each connector provided on the existing main control board 80. However, an existing connector may be used so that the proportion display signal is output from the connector.

As shown in FIG. 84(B), the connector CN4 of the external output ratio display device 900 is connected to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80, and the external switch display device 900 is turned on by operating the changeover switch 920. .. As a result, the proportion display signal is output from the main control board 80 to the external proportion display device 900 via the connector CN3. As a result, in the external proportion display device 900 that receives the proportion display signal, the proportion and the proportion displayed are the same in the four lighting regions of the display unit 910 as in the first embodiment (see FIG. 26). It is possible to indicate whether it is a character role ratio or a continuous character ratio, and whether the displayed output rate is an effective value or a reference value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 85, the main control board 80 is provided with a serial communication circuit 170. This serial communication circuit 170 is for performing serial communication with the external output ratio display device 900 connected to the connector CN3, and is connected to the game control microcomputer 81. The external output ratio display device 900 is also provided with a serial communication circuit. By these serial communication circuits, it is possible to transmit a rate display signal (serial signal) from the game control microcomputer 81 to the external rate display device 900 by serial communication.

Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the drive circuit 200F of the fourth embodiment has the same configuration as an existing drive circuit that displays game information. That is, unlike the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first embodiment, a circuit section for displaying the output rate is not newly added. This is because the circuit unit for displaying the proportion is provided in the external proportion display device 900. Therefore, it is possible to display the proportion on the external proportion display device 900 without changing the design of the existing drive circuit 200F displaying the game information.

[Input Processing] In the input processing (S101) of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 87, steps S123 and S124 are newly provided in addition to the input processing (S101) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 87, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S111 that it is not the winning detection signal (NO in S111), the process proceeds to step S123. In step S123, it is determined whether or not a connection signal is input from the external output ratio display device 900 via the connector CN3 and the serial communication circuit 170. The connection signal is a signal output from the external output ratio display device 900 to the main control board 80 when the external output ratio display device 900 is in the ON state and the connector CN4 is connected to the connector CN3. If the connection signal is input (YES in S123), a serial communication circuit setting process for causing the serial communication circuit 170 to perform serial communication with the external output ratio display device 900 is executed (S124), and the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, if the connection signal is not input (NO in S123), the process skips step S124 and proceeds to step S122.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 88, first, the game control microcomputer 81 executes game display processing (S2303, see FIG. 53). That is, in the output process (S107) of the fourth mode, unlike the output process (S107) of the first mode shown in FIG. 52, the game display process (S2303) and the proportion display process (S2304) are alternatively performed. Since this is not the case, the game display processing (S2303) is always executed. Therefore, it is possible to display the game information on the game display 40 while displaying the participation rate on the external participation rate display device 900. After step S2303, it is determined whether the above-mentioned connection signal is input (S2315). If not input (NO in S2315), the process proceeds to step S2305.

On the other hand, if it is input (YES in S2315), signal output processing is executed (S2316), and the process proceeds to step S2305. In the signal output process (S2316), the output rate display signal is output to the connector CN3 via the serial communication circuit 170. In the output ratio display signal, information on the output ratio (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio) calculated by the ratio calculation processing (S117, see FIG. 47) (specifically, stored in the character ratio storage area). Value, the value stored in the continuous accessory ratio storage area), information on the value of the variation counter, information on the value of the actual total prize ball number counter, and the like. As a result, the external proportion display device 900 connected to the connector CN3 indicates whether the proportion, role ratio, or continuous role ratio is displayed on the display unit 910 based on the input rate display signal. It is possible to indicate whether the value is a valid value or a reference value.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 84(B), the proportion can be confirmed by displaying the proportion on the display unit 910 of the external proportion display device 900. It is possible. Further, the connector CN4 of the external proportion display device 900 is connected to the connector CN3 only when confirming the proportion, and when the proportion is not confirmed, as shown in FIG. It is possible to disconnect the connector CN4 of the device 900 from the connector CN3. That is, unlike the first embodiment described above, the proportion display device 300 for displaying the proportion is not always provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to realize a configuration capable of confirming the proportion with a small design change to the existing pachinko gaming machine.

In short, since it is not necessary to dispose the proportion display unit 300 and the circuit section for displaying the proportion on the main control board 80, the parts on the main control board 80 are arranged close to each other, as in the first embodiment, and the arrangement space is small. It is possible to solve the problem that must be secured. Further, it is possible to suppress the cost increase by providing only the connector CN3 as in the fourth mode, while providing the proportion indicator 300 for all the pachinko gaming machines increases the cost. Is. In other words, when checking the proportion, it is only necessary to check one pachinko gaming machine at a time, and it is not necessary to check a plurality of pachinko gaming machines at the same time. Therefore, it suffices to prepare one external proportion display device 900 for the plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 of the fourth mode, and thus it is possible to carry out at low cost. Since the external power ratio display device 900 is an external device, it is possible to arrange many types (variations) as external devices.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth aspect, the proportion display signal includes information on the proportion (role ratio, continuous duty ratio) calculated by the proportion calculation processing (S117). .. That is, the proportion is not calculated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 but by the external proportion display device 900. Therefore, it is possible to carry out with a device having only a display function, without preparing a special device that can calculate the output rate as an external device.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 85, since the main control board 80 includes the serial communication circuit 170, the external output ratio display device connected to the connector CN3 by serial communication. It is possible to display the percentage on 900. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of wirings (signals) for displaying the output ratio as compared with the case of displaying the output ratio on the external output display device 900 by parallel communication. That is, by reducing the number of wirings that connect the main control board 80 and the external output ratio display device 900, it is possible to reduce design changes to the main control board 80.

In the fourth embodiment, the proportion display signal includes information on the proportion (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio) calculated by the ratio calculation processing (S117). However, you may change as follows. That is, the proportion display signal does not include the information on the proportion, but the value of the actual total prize ball number counter (total prize ball number) and the value of the character prize ball counter (number of character prize balls). And information on the value of the continuous character prize ball number counter (number of continuous character prize balls). In this case, when the external proportion display device connected to the connector CN3 inputs the proportion display signal, information on the total number of prize balls, the number of character prize balls, and the information on the number of continuous character prize balls is obtained. Based on, the output rate is calculated. Then, the external proportion display device displays the calculated proportion on the display unit. In this way, unlike the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can not calculate the output rate, and it is possible to reduce the load of control processing by the game control microcomputer 81. That is, it is possible not to provide the proportion calculation processing (117).

<Modification of Fourth Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a modified example of the fourth embodiment will be described based on FIG. 89. In the fourth mode, the external proportion display device (external device) 900, which is not a component of the pachinko gaming machine 1, can display the proportion. On the other hand, in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the external base display device (external device) 900, which is not a component of the pachinko gaming machine 1, can display the base. Note that the external base display device 900 has exactly the same hardware configuration as the external output display device 900 (see FIG. 84) described above, and its name is simply changed.

In the modified example of the fourth mode, the base display signal is output to the external base display device 900 by the connector (connecting portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80. The base display signal is a signal for causing the external base display device 900 to display the base. The base display signal includes information on the normal base, the time saving base, and the jackpot base calculated by the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68), and is counted by the counter addition process (S161, see FIG. 67). Information on the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the short-time firing ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot firing ball number counter is included. Further, information on the value of the variation counter is also included.

By connecting the connector CN4 (see FIG. 84(B)) of the external base display device 900 to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80 as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the main control board 80 through the connector CN3. A base display signal may be output to the external base display device 900. As a result, the external base display device 900 to which the base display signal has been input has four bases in the four lighting regions of the display unit 910 (see FIG. 84(B)). It is possible to indicate whether it is a jackpot base or whether the displayed base is a valid value or a reference value.

The main control board 80 is provided with the serial communication circuit 170 (see FIG. 85) as described in the fourth embodiment. The serial communication circuit 170 is for performing serial communication with the external base display device 900 connected to the connector CN3, and is connected to the game control microcomputer 81. The external base display device 900 is also provided with a serial communication circuit. With these serial communication circuits, it is possible to transmit a base display signal (serial signal) from the game control microcomputer 81 to the external base display device 900 by serial communication.

[Input Processing] In the input processing (S101) of the modified example of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 89, steps S158 and S159 are newly added to the input processing (S101) of the modified example of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Has been. As shown in FIG. 89, if the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S150 that it is not the entry detection signal (NO in S150), the process proceeds to step S158. In step S158, it is determined whether or not a connection signal is input from the external base display device 900 via the connector CN3 and the serial communication circuit 170. The connection signal is a signal output from the external base display device 900 to the main control board 80 when the external base display device 900 is in the ON state and the connector CN4 is connected to the connector CN3. If the connection signal is input (YES in S158), a serial communication circuit setting process for causing the serial communication circuit 170 to perform serial communication with the external base display device 900 is executed (S159), and the process proceeds to step S122. On the other hand, if the connection signal is not input (NO in S158), the process skips step S159 and proceeds to step S122.

As described above, according to the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the base can be confirmed by displaying the base on the display unit 910 of the external base display device 900 (see FIG. 84B). Further, it is possible to connect the connector CN4 of the external base display device 900 to the connector CN3 only when confirming the base, and detach the connector CN4 of the external base display device 900 from the connector CN3 when not confirming the base. Yes (see FIG. 84(A)). Therefore, it is possible to realize the configuration capable of confirming the base with a small design change to the existing pachinko gaming machine. The operational effects of the other modified examples are different from the operational effects of the above-described fourth embodiment only in that the output rate is changed to the base, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the modification of the fourth embodiment, the base display signal includes the information on the normal base, the time saving base, and the jackpot base calculated by the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68). However, you may change as follows. That is, the base display signal does not include the base information, but the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the time-saving firing ball number counter, and the number of jackpots fired by the counter addition process (S161, see FIG. 67) are counted. In addition to the information on the value of the counter, the value of the normal total prize ball number counter, the value of the time saving total prize ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot total prize ball number counter are included. In this case, when the external base display device connected to the connector CN3 inputs the base display signal, the base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is calculated based on the values of the counters described above. Then, the external base display device displays the calculated base on the display unit. By doing so, unlike the modification of the fourth embodiment, the base of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be not calculated, and the load of the control processing by the game control microcomputer 81 can be reduced. That is, it is possible not to provide the base calculation process (S152).

<Fifth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 90 to 92. In the first embodiment, even when the proportion display unit 300 does not display the proportion, the proportion previously displayed is displayed as it is on the proportion display unit 300. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, when the proportion display unit 300 does not display the proportion, as shown in FIG. 90, “---” is displayed on the proportion display unit 300. There is. That is, the proportion lighting unit LB7 is lit in the first lighting region 310, the proportion lighting unit LB15 is lit in the second lighting region 320, and the proportion lighting unit LB23 is lit in the third lighting region 330. The output lighting unit LB31 is lit in the fourth lighting region 340. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 91, steps S2311, S2312, S2313 are newly provided in addition to the output processing (S107) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 91, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 goes through the proportion display processing. (S2304), the change completion flag is turned off (S2311). The change completion flag indicates that the display of "---" on the proportion display 300 is completed, as will be described later.

On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the proportion display unit 300 does not display the proportion. In this case, it is determined in step S2312 whether the change completion flag is ON. If it is not ON (NO in S2312), “−−−−” is displayed on the proportion display device 300, so that the display changing process described later is executed (S2313). On the other hand, if the change completion flag is ON (YES in S2312), the display of "---" on the proportion display 300 has been completed, and thus the game display processing is executed as described above (S2303). ..

[Display Change Processing] As shown in FIG. 92, in the display change processing (S2313), it is first determined whether or not the change flag is "1" (S2801). The change flag is set to any value of "1" or "2" or "3" or "4", and any one of the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the proportion display 300 is lit. It indicates whether "-" is displayed in the area. If the change flag is "1" (YES in S2801), the data information D[0...3]=D[1000] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2802), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to " Switch to "H" (S2803). Then, to display "-", data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2804), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2805). As a result, in the first lighting region 310, only the proportion lighting unit LB7 is lit, and "-" is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to "2" (S2806), and this processing ends.

If the change flag is not "1" in step S2801, then it is determined whether the change flag is "2" (S2807). If the change flag is "2" (YES in S2807), the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2808), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to " Switch to "H" (S2809). Then, to display "-", data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2810), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2811). As a result, in the second lighting region 320, only the proportion lighting unit LB15 is lit, and "-" is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to "3" (S2812), and this processing ends.

If the change flag is not "2" in step S2807, it is subsequently determined whether the change flag is "3" (S2813). If the change flag is "3" (YES in S2813), the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 (S2814), and the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is set to " Switch to "H" (S2815). Subsequently, in order to display "-", data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2816), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2817). As a result, in the third lighting region 330, only the proportion lighting unit LB23 is lit, and "-" is displayed. Then, the change flag is set to "4" (S2818), and this processing ends.

If the change flag is not "3" in step S2813, it means that the change flag is "4", and the process advances to step S2819. In step S2819, the data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, and then the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to "H" (S2820). Then, to display "-", the data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2821), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to "H". (S2822). As a result, in the fourth lighting region 340, only the proportion lighting unit LB31 is lit, and "-" is displayed. Then, the change completion flag is set to ON (S2823), the change flag is set to "1" (S2824), and this processing is finished.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth mode, when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and is in the customer waiting state is satisfied, the first lighting region 310 of the proportion display device 300. The mode of the second lighting region 320 (display region) is a numerical mode (for example, “60”, refer to FIG. 26) indicating the output rate. This makes it possible to check the outflow rate. On the other hand, when the display condition is not satisfied (the game is in progress), the mode of the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 of the proportion display device 300 becomes “−−” (non-numeric mode). Therefore, it is possible to reliably recognize that the proportion is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to avoid erroneously recognizing that the proportion when the display condition is satisfied is displayed as it is while the game is in progress, and the proportion is the current proportion. In particular, even when the gaming machine frame 50 is opened and the proportion display device 300 is viewed, the variation of the special symbol is still displayed, or the game ball enters the starting openings 20 and 21 and the game continues. Is possible. At this time, it is possible to prevent a person who confirms the proportion from judging whether or not there is an abnormality based on the proportion that was left and displayed before.

Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fifth mode, during execution of the variable display of the special symbol or during the control to the jackpot gaming state (when in the gaming control state), the proportion display is calculated without calculating the proportion. The mode of the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 of the container 300 is set to "-". That is, when the proportion display unit 300 does not display the proportion, the wasteful control process of calculating the proportion is not performed. And, in the game control state, the burden of control processing is larger than that in the customer waiting state. Therefore, in the game control state where the load of control processing is large, by not performing the calculation and display of the output rate, it is possible to reduce the load of control processing by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). Is. Since the other operational effects of the fifth mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first mode, description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth embodiment, when the display condition is not satisfied (the proportion display processing (S2304) is not executed), as shown in FIG. 90, the display area (first lighting area 310 and "---" is displayed in the second lighting region 320). However, if it can be recognized that the proportion is not displayed, a display mode other than “−−” may be used, and the display mode can be appropriately changed. For example, the display area in which the proportion may be displayed may be a non-display mode in which nothing is displayed (a mode in which each proportion lighting unit is turned off), and a predetermined identification such as “77” is set. The number mode (a mode different from the number mode indicating the rate) may be used.

<Modification of Fifth Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a modified example of the fifth mode will be described based on FIG. 93. In the fifth embodiment, when the output ratio is not displayed on the output ratio display 300, "---" is displayed on the output ratio display 300 (see FIG. 90). On the other hand, in the modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the base is not displayed on the base display 300, "---" is displayed on the base display 300.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the modification of the fifth embodiment shown in FIG. 93, steps S2311, S2312, S2313 are added to the output processing (S107) of the modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. It is provided in. As shown in FIG. 93, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 goes through the base display processing ( (S2340), the change completion flag is turned off (S2311). On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the base is not displayed on the base display 300. In this case, it is determined in step S2312 whether the change completion flag is ON. If it is not ON (NO in S2312), "---" is displayed on the base display 300, so the above-described display change processing is executed (S2313, see FIG. 92). On the other hand, if the change completion flag is ON (YES in S2312), since the display of "---" is completed on the base display 300, the game display processing is executed as described above (S2303).

As described above, according to the modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and is in the customer waiting state is satisfied, the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 310 of the base display 300 and the second The lighting area 320 (display area) is in the form of numbers indicating the base. This makes it possible to confirm the base. On the other hand, when the display condition is not satisfied (while the game is in progress), the modes of the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 of the base display 300 become "-" (non-numeric mode). Therefore, it is possible to surely recognize that the base is not displayed. In this way, it is possible to avoid erroneously recognizing that the base at the time when the display condition is satisfied is displayed as it is while the game is in progress, and is the current base. The operational effects of the other modified examples are different from the operational effects of the fifth embodiment described above only in that the output rate is changed to the base, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the modified example of the fifth embodiment, when the display condition is not satisfied (the base display process (S2340) is not executed), the display area where the base can be displayed (first lighting area 310 and second lighting area 320). "--" is displayed on the screen. However, if it can be recognized that the base is not displayed, a display mode other than "---" may be used, and the display mode can be appropriately changed. For example, the display area in which the base can be displayed may be a non-display mode in which nothing is displayed (a mode in which the base is turned off), and a predetermined specific number mode (number indicating the base) such as “77”. (Aspect different from the aspect).

<Sixth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 94 to 96. In the first embodiment, the output ratio indicator 300 indicates that the character ratio does not exceed 70% (70%) or the continuous character ratio does not exceed 60% (60%). It is supposed to be confirmed by the rate. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, it is confirmed in the light emission mode of the special LED 350 that the accessory ratio does not exceed 70% or the continuous accessory ratio does not exceed 60%. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 94, the special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means, light emitting means) 350 is arranged on the main control board 80 and can change the light emitting mode. The game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80, the mode of the special LED350, the extinguishing mode shown in FIG. 94(A), the lighting mode (first light emitting mode) shown in FIG. 94(B), and FIG. 94(C). It is possible to switch to the blinking mode (second light emitting mode) shown in FIG.

In the sixth mode, when displaying the participation rate, the total number of prize balls acquired from the time the power is first turned on to the present time is less than 10,000, and the special award is special from the time the power is first turned on to the present time. When the number of fluctuations in which the variable display of symbols is executed is less than 3000, the special LED 350 is turned off. In this way, the person who sees the special LED 350 in the extinguished mode can be made aware of the possibility that the output rate has not yet converged.

Also, when displaying the percentage, if the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the character ratio does not exceed 70% or the continuous character ratio exceeds 60%. If not, the special LED 350 is turned on. As a result, a person who sees the special LED 350 in the lighting mode is made to understand that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been tampered with as a result of the convergence rate to some extent. On the other hand, when the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the character ratio exceeds 70% (specified value) or the continuous character ratio exceeds 60% (specified value). If it exceeds, the special LED 350 is changed to the blinking mode. As a result, a person who sees the special LED 350 in the blinking mode is made to understand that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been improperly modified or broken down as a result of the convergence rate to some extent.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 95, steps S2308, S2309, S2310 are newly added to the output processing (S107) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 95, when the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines a predetermined value in the gaming RAM 84. It is determined whether lighting mode data or blinking mode data is set in the storage area (S2308). The lighting mode data is data for setting the special LED 350 in the lighting mode, and the blinking mode data is data for setting the special LED 350 in the blinking mode. If these data are set (YES in S2308), turn-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2309), and game display processing is executed (S2303). The extinguishing mode data is data for turning off the special LED 350. In this way, when displaying the game information related to the progress of the game on the game display device 40, the special LED 350 is always in the off state, so that the power consumption can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), after the proportion display processing (S2304), the special LED processing is executed. (S2310).

[Special LED processing] As shown in FIG. 96, in the special LED processing (S2310), is the value of the actual total prize ball number counter of the special memory 89 "100" or more (total prize ball number is 10,000 or more)? It is determined whether or not (S2701). If it is less than "100" (NO in S2701), it is then determined whether or not the value of the variation counter of the special memory 89 is "3000" or more (S2702). If it is less than "3000" (NO in S2702), the turn-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2708), and this processing is finished. In this way, when the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, the special LED 350 is turned off.

On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize ball number counter is "100" or more (YES in S2701) or the value of the variation number counter is "3000" or more (YES in S2702), then the display is continued. It is determined whether the flag is "1" (S2703). If it is "1" (YES in S2703), then it is determined whether or not the value of the character ratio stored in the character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 exceeds "70" (S2704). If it does not exceed (NO in S2704), the lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2707), and the present processing ends. If the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2703), it is determined whether the value of the continuous character ratio stored in the continuous character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 exceeds "60". (S2705). If it does not exceed (NO in S2705), the lighting mode data is set (S2707), and this processing ends. Thus, the condition of the special LED 350 becomes the lighting mode when the character ratio does not exceed 70% or the continuous character ratio does not exceed 60% on the condition that the output ratio is an effective value that has converged to some extent. Become.

On the other hand, if the value of the character ratio exceeds "70" in step S2704, or if the value of the continuous character ratio exceeds "60" in step S2705, a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84. The blinking mode data is set to (S2706), and this processing ends. Thus, the condition of the special LED 350 becomes a blinking mode when the character ratio exceeds 70% or the continuous character ratio exceeds 60% on the condition that the output ratio is an effective value that has converged to some extent. Become.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the sixth embodiment, when the accessory ratio exceeds 70% or the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, the special LED 350 is switched from the lighting mode or the extinguishing mode to the blinking mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the proportion can grasp the special LED 350 in the blinking mode, and thus the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be more easily and promptly compared to the case where the proportion is displayed on the proportion indicator 300. It is possible to determine that there has been an unauthorized modification or failure of the equipment (confirm the abnormality in the proportion). Further, if the special LED 350 is turned on, it is possible to easily and promptly determine that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been tampered with or damaged as a result of the convergence of the output ratio to some extent. Is. On the other hand, if the special LED 350 is turned off, it is possible to easily and immediately determine that the output ratio has not yet converged. The other operational effects of the sixth mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first mode, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of sixth embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 97 and 98. In the sixth embodiment, whether or not the output ratio is within the normal range (the ratio of the accessory character does not exceed 70% and the ratio of the continuous character object does not exceed 60%) is confirmed by the light emitting mode of the special LED 350. I did it. On the other hand, in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, whether the base is within the normal range is confirmed by the light emitting mode of the special LED 350.

Here, the case where the base is within the normal range will be described. In the modified example of the sixth mode, the normal base is within the normal range when the normal base is 30% or more and 39% or less. If the time saving base is 84% or more and 99% or less, the time saving base is within the normal range. If the jackpot base is 600% or more and 800% or less, the jackpot base is within the normal range. Then, if all of the normal base, the time saving base and the jackpot base are within the normal range, it is determined that the base is within the normal range. On the other hand, if any one of the normal base, the time saving base, and the big hit base is outside the normal range (abnormal range), the base is determined to be outside the normal range.

Further, in the modified example of the sixth mode, when the base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is displayed, the total number of shot balls from when the power is turned on to the present time is less than 100,000, and the power is turned on. If the number of variations in which the variation display of the special symbol has been performed up to the present time is less than 3000 times, the aspect of the special LED is turned off. This allows the person who sees the special LED 350 in the off mode to know that the base may not yet converge.

Further, when the base is displayed, if the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, and the base is within the normal range, the special LED 350 is turned on. This allows the person who sees the special LED 350 in the lighting mode to understand that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been tampered with or damaged as a result of the base having converged to some extent. On the other hand, when the total number of fired balls is 100,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, and the base is out of the normal range (abnormal range), the special LED 350 is changed to the blinking mode. This allows the person who sees the special LED 350 in the blinking mode to understand that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illegally modified or broken as a result of convergence to some extent.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. 97, steps S2308, S2309, S2341 are newly added to the output processing (S107) of the modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. ing. As shown in FIG. 97, when the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines a predetermined value in the gaming RAM 84. It is determined whether lighting mode data or blinking mode data is set in the storage area (S2308). If these data are set (YES in S2308), turn-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the game RAM 84 (S2309), and game display processing is executed (S2303). On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), after executing the base display process (S2340, see FIGS. 70 to 73), The special LED processing described later is executed (S2341).

[Special LED processing] As shown in FIG. 98, in the special LED processing (S2341), the total number of shot balls (the number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the time saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state) It is determined whether or not the total) is 100,000 or more (S2710). That is, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the short-time firing ball number counter, and the value of the jackpot firing ball number counter is “1000” or more. If it is less than "100000" (NO in S2710), then it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is "3000" or more (S2711). If it is less than "3000" (NO in S2711), the turn-off mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2715), and this processing ends. Thus, when the total number of fired balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, the special LED 350 is turned off.

On the other hand, if the total number of shots is “100000” or more (YES in S2710), or if the number of fluctuations is “3000” or more (YES in S2711), whether the base is within the normal range or not. It is determined (S2712). That is, the normal base is 30% or more and 39% or less, the time saving base is 84% or more and 99% or less, and the jackpot base is 600% or more and 800% or less. It is determined whether all the conditions are satisfied. If the base is within the normal range (YES in S2712), the lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2713), and this processing is ended. In this way, the condition of the special LED 350 becomes the lighting condition when the base is within the normal range on condition that the value of the base converges to some extent.

On the other hand, if the base is not within the normal range (NO in S2712), blink mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2714), and this processing ends. In this way, the condition of the special LED 350 is a blinking condition when the base is out of the normal range on the condition that the value of the base converges to some extent.

As described above, according to the modified example of the sixth embodiment, when the base is changed from within the normal range to outside the normal range, the special LED 350 is switched from the lighting mode (or the extinguishing mode) to the blinking mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the base recognizes that the special LED 350 is in the blinking mode, and thus, it is easier and more prompt for the pachinko gaming machine 1 than when confirming the base on the base display 300. It is possible to judge that a modification or breakdown has occurred (check the abnormality of the base). Further, if the special LED 350 is turned on, it is possible to easily and immediately determine that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been tampered with or modified as a result of the convergence of the base to some extent. is there. On the other hand, if the special LED 350 is turned off, it is possible to easily and immediately determine that the base has not converged. The operational effects of the other modified examples are the same as the operational effects of the sixth embodiment described above except that the output rate is changed to the base, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Seventh form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 99 to 104. In the sixth embodiment, after calculating the output rate, it is notified whether or not the calculated output rate (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio) exceeds the specified value (70% or 60%). On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, even if the output rate is not calculated, it is notified whether or not the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value. Hereinafter, differences from the first form and the sixth form will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the seventh embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment described above, special LEDs (notifying means, abnormality notifying means, light emitting means) are arranged on the main control board 80. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 81, the mode of the special LED350, the extinguishing mode shown in FIG. 99(A), the lighting mode (first mode) shown in FIG. 99(B), and the blinking shown in FIG. 99(C). It is possible to switch to the mode (second mode). In the seventh embodiment, the proportion display device 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80, and the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the proportion display processing (S2304). Therefore, the drive circuit of the seventh mode has the same configuration as an existing drive circuit that displays game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth mode (see FIG. 86) described above.

Here, a method of determining whether or not the output rate exceeds a prescribed value (is within a normal range) without calculating the output rate will be described. For example, when the total number of prize balls is 10,000 (the value of the actual total prize ball number counter is “100”), it means that the character ratio exceeds 70%. The situation is over 7,000. Further, for example, when the total number of prize balls is 15,000, the fact that the ratio of the prize is over 70% means that the number of prize balls is over 10500. In this way, the number of accessory prize balls when the total number of prize balls is the predetermined determination total prize ball number (10000 shots described above, 15000 shots) is the reference abnormal value (7000 shots described above, 10500 shots described above). ), it is possible to determine whether or not the character ratio exceeds 70% at that time. Utilizing this point, in the seventh embodiment, the duty ratio is not sequentially calculated, and it is determined whether or not the duty ratio substantially exceeds 70% only by the magnitude judgment at a certain timing. In the above description, the role ratio is described as an example, but the same applies to the continuous role ratio, and thus the description is omitted.

Thus, in the seventh mode, the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81 stores the simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 100, the simple abnormality determination table determines the value of the total number of prize balls at the determination timing (determination total number of prize balls) and whether the accessory ratio exceeds 70% at the determination timing. Value (abnormality judgment value) for determining the number of continuous character prize balls for determining whether the continuous character ratio exceeds 60% at the determination timing (abnormality judgment Value) is shown.

By referring to this simple abnormality determination table, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the total number of prize balls has reached the determined total number of prize balls. Then, if the total number of judgment prize balls has been reached, it is further determined whether the number of prize prize balls exceeds the reference abnormal value, or whether the number of consecutive prize prize balls exceeds the reference abnormal value. It is like this. As a result, if it exceeds the reference abnormal value, the output rate (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio) exceeds the specified value (70%, 60%), and the special LED 350 is changed to a blinking mode. To do. On the other hand, if the standard abnormal value is not exceeded, the output rate does not exceed the specified value, and the special LED 350 is turned on. In the seventh mode, it is assumed that the value of the output rate has not substantially converged until the number of times of change reaches 3000 times, and the special LED 350 is turned off.

[Input Processing] In the output processing (S101) of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 101, step S127 is provided instead of steps S115 to S121 of the input processing (S101) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 84, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the award ball number counter addition processing in step S114 and then executes the simple abnormality determination processing (S127).

[Simple Abnormality Determination Process] As shown in FIG. 102, in the simple abnormality determination process (S127), first, the simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 100 is referenced (S130). Then, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls at the present time has reached the determined total number of prize balls (10000, 15000, 20000, 25000...) (S131). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the actual total prize ball number counter (see FIG. 11C) is 100, 150, 200, 250,.... If the number of judged total prize balls has not been reached (NO in S131), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the number of judged total prize balls has been reached (YES in S131), it is determined whether or not the number of accessory prize balls at the present time exceeds the reference abnormal value corresponding to the judged total prize balls (S132). ). For example, when the value of the actual total prize ball number counter reaches "100", it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory prize ball number counter exceeds "7000". If it exceeds (YES in S132), the abnormality flag is turned on (S133), and this processing ends. The abnormality flag indicates that the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value.

On the other hand, if the number of prize prize balls does not exceed the reference abnormal value (NO in S132), then the number of consecutive prize prize balls at the present time exceeds the reference abnormal value corresponding to the judgment total prize balls. It is determined whether or not (S134). For example, when the value of the actual total prize ball number counter reaches "100", it is determined whether or not the value of the continuous award prize ball number counter exceeds "6000". If it exceeds (YES in S134), the abnormality flag is turned on (S133), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it does not exceed (NO in S134), the abnormality flag is turned off (S135), and this processing ends.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 103, step S2320 is provided instead of steps S2304 and S2310 of the output processing (S107) of the sixth embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 103, when the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes special LED processing. (S2330).

[Special LED Processing] As shown in FIG. 104, in the special LED processing (S2330), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter of the special memory 89 is “3000” or more (the variation is 3000 or more). Yes (S2720). If it is "3000" or more (YES in S2720), it is determined whether or not the abnormality flag is ON (S2721). If the abnormality flag is ON (YES in S2721), it means that the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value, so the blink mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2722), This process ends. On the other hand, if the abnormality flag is not ON (NO in S2721), the output rate does not substantially exceed the specified value, so the lighting mode data is set in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84 (S2723). ), and ends this processing. On the other hand, if the value of the variation counter is less than "3000" (NO in S2720), it is determined that the output rate value has not yet converged, and the extinguishing mode data is stored in a predetermined storage area of the gaming RAM 84. This is set (S2724), and this processing ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, when the accessory ratio exceeds 70% or the continuous accessory ratio exceeds 60%, the special LED 350 blinks from the lighting mode or the non-lighting mode. Switch to the mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the output rate recognizes that the special LED 350 is in the blinking mode, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a malfunction or malfunction, or is illegally modified. It is possible to visually judge immediately.

In particular, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, it is possible to notify a substantial abnormality in the output rate by a simple method without calculating the output rate. That is, since the above-described proportion calculation processing (S117, see FIG. 47) is not executed, the division control processing becomes unnecessary. Instead, when the total number of prize balls reaches a predetermined judgment total number of prize balls, it is internally judged whether or not the number of character prize balls or the number of consecutive character prize balls exceeds the reference abnormal value. I just do it. As a result, it is possible for the game control microcomputer 81 to notify the abnormality of the proportion while avoiding the complexity of the processing and the increase of the processing load due to the division (calculation of the proportion) by software.

Then, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the seventh embodiment, it is sufficient to notify the abnormality of the substantial output rate by the special LED 350 without the notification of the numerical output rate. As shown, the output indicator 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80. That is, in terms of hardware, only one special LED 350 is mainly added on the main control board 80. Therefore, it is easy to solve the problem of securing a space on the main control board 80, and it is possible to reduce the design change from the existing pachinko gaming machine and carry out it at low cost. Since the other operational effects of the seventh mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first mode, description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of Seventh Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a modified example of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. In the seventh embodiment, whether or not the output rate substantially exceeds the specified value (whether the output rate is within the normal range) is notified even if the output rate is not calculated. On the other hand, in the modification of the seventh embodiment, whether or not the base is substantially within the normal range is notified even if the base is not calculated.

In the modified example of the seventh mode, as in the case of the seventh mode described above, special LEDs (notifying means, abnormality notifying means, light emitting means) are arranged on the main control board 80 (see FIG. 99). Then, the base display 300 is not arranged on the main control board 80, and the game control microcomputer 81 does not execute the base display processing (S2340). Therefore, the drive circuit of the modified example of the seventh mode has the same configuration as the existing drive circuit that displays the game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth mode (see FIG. 86) described above.

Here, a method of determining whether or not the base is out of the normal range (including whether or not the normal upper limit is exceeded) without calculating the base will be described. For example, when the number of shot balls in the normal game state is 10,000 (the value of the normal shot ball number counter is "100"), the normal base is out of the normal range in the normal game state. The total number of prize balls exceeds 3900. In addition, for example, when the number of shots in the time saving state is 2500 (the value of the time saving firing number counter is "25"), the fact that the time saving base is out of the normal range means that The situation is that the number of prize balls exceeds 2457. In addition, for example, when the number of shot balls in the jackpot game state is 1000 (the value of the jackpot launch ball number counter is "10"), the jackpot base is out of the normal range in the jackpot game state. The total number of award balls is over 8000. In this way, the total number of prize balls when the number of shot balls in each game state is the predetermined number of judged shot balls (10,000 shots, 2500 shots, 1000 shots, etc. described above) is the normal upper limit value (described above). It is possible to judge whether or not each base is out of the normal range at that point in time by seeing whether it exceeds 3900, 2457, 8000, etc.). By utilizing this point, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, it is judged whether or not each base is practically out of the normal range only by judging the magnitude at a certain timing without sequentially calculating each base.

In addition, in the modification of the seventh embodiment, not only is it checked whether the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit value when the number of shoot balls in each game state is a predetermined determination number of shoot balls, It is also possible to check whether the value is smaller than the lower limit of normality (see FIGS. 105(A)(B)(C)). For example, if the total number of award balls in the normal game state is less than 3000 when the number of shot balls in the normal game state is 10,000, it is determined to be out of the normal range. Further, for example, if the total number of award balls in the time saving state is less than 2100 when the number of shot balls in the time saving state is 2500, it is determined to be out of the normal range. Further, for example, when the number of shot balls in the big hit game state is 1000, and the total number of prize balls in the big hit game state is smaller than 6000, it is determined to be out of the normal range.

Thus, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81 has a normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105(A), a time saving simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105(B), and FIG. The jackpot simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 105(A), the normal simple abnormality determination table has a value of the number of determination firing balls at the determination timing in the normal gaming state and whether or not the normal base is within the normal range at the determination timing. The values of the total number of prize balls (lower limit of normal value, upper limit of normal value) are shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the time saving simple abnormality determination table has a value of the number of judgment firing balls which becomes the judgment timing in the time saving state and whether the time saving base is within the normal range at the judgment timing. The values of the total number of prize balls (lower limit of normal value, upper limit of normal value) are shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the jackpot simple abnormality determination table is a value of the number of determination firing balls which becomes the determination timing in the jackpot gaming state, and whether or not the jackpot base is within the normal range at the determination timing. The total number of prize balls (normal lower limit value, normal upper limit value) for determining whether or not is shown.

With reference to these simple abnormality determination tables, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of shot balls in each gaming state has reached the determined number of shot balls. Then, if the number of judgment firing balls has been reached, it is judged whether or not the normal upper limit value is exceeded and whether or not it is smaller than the normal lower limit value. As a result, if it exceeds the normal upper limit value or is smaller than the normal lower limit value, it means that the base is out of the normal range, and the special LED 350 is changed to the blinking mode. On the other hand, if it is equal to or less than the normal upper limit value and equal to or more than the normal lower limit value, it means that the base is within the normal range, and the special LED 350 is changed to the lighting mode. In the modified example of the seventh mode, as in the above-described seventh mode, it is assumed that the value of the base has not substantially converged until the number of fluctuations reaches 3000 times, and the mode of the special LED 350 is turned off. To do.

[Input Processing] In the output processing (S101) of the modification of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. 106, steps S115, S116, S118, S152 to S157 of the input processing (S101) of the modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Instead, step S191 is provided. As shown in FIG. 106, the game control microcomputer 81 executes counter addition processing (see FIG. 67) in step S151, and then executes simple abnormality determination processing described later (S191).

[Simple Abnormality Judgment Processing] As shown in FIG. 107, in the simple abnormality judgment processing (S191), first, the simple abnormality judgment table corresponding to the game state is referred to (S192). That is, in the normal game state, the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105(A) is referred to. In the case of the time saving state, the time saving simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105(B) is referred to. If the jackpot gaming state, refer to the jackpot simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105 (C). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of judgment firing balls shown in the referred simple abnormality judgment table has been reached (S193). For example, when referring to the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105(A), whether or not the value of the normal firing ball number counter is "100" (the number of firing balls in the normal gaming state is 10,000) To judge. If it is not the number of judgment firing balls (NO in S193), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the number of judgment firing balls (YES in S193), the total number of prize balls in the corresponding gaming state is equal to or lower than the normal upper limit value shown in the referenced simple abnormality judgment table, and equal to or higher than the normal lower limit value. It is determined whether or not (S194). For example, referring to the normal simple abnormality determination table shown in FIG. 105(A), when the value of the normal shot ball number counter is “100”, is the value of the normal total prize ball number counter 3900 or less? It is determined whether or not it is 3000 or more. If the decision result in the step S194 is NO, the abnormality flag is turned ON (S195), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if the decision result in the step S194 is YES, the abnormality flag is turned off (S196), and the present process is ended.

The output process (S107) of the modified example of the seventh mode is the same as the output process of the seventh mode (S107, see FIG. 103) described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted. Further, the special LED processing (S2330) of the modified example of the seventh embodiment is similar to the special LED processing (S2330, see FIG. 104) of the seventh embodiment described above, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, according to the modified example of the seventh mode, when the base is substantially out of the normal range, the special LED 350 is switched from the lighting mode (or the extinguishing mode) to the blinking mode. Therefore, the person who confirms the base recognizes that the special LED 350 is in the blinking mode, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a malfunction or malfunction, or is illegally modified. It is possible to judge visually immediately. Particularly, according to the modified example of the seventh embodiment, it is possible to notify the substantial abnormality of the base by a simple method without calculating the base. Therefore, it is possible for the game control microcomputer 81 to notify the abnormality of the base while avoiding the complexity of the processing and the increase of the processing load due to the division by software (calculation of the base). The operational effects of the other modified examples are the same as the operational effects of the seventh embodiment described above except that the output rate is changed to the base, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Eighth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 108 to 112. In the first embodiment, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80, the prize ball number counter addition processing for measuring the total prize ball number and the accessory working prize ball number (S114, see FIG. 46), and The ratio calculation process (S117, see FIG. 47) for calculating the ratio is executed. On the other hand, in the eighth embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout control board (specific control board) 110 causes the prize ball number counter addition processing (S5104, see FIG. 112) and the proportion calculation processing (S5105, FIG. 112). (See ). Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the eighth embodiment, when the main control board 80 receives the winning detection signal, it outputs a prize ball command (winning information) to the payout control board 110. Thereby, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of prize winning prize balls, based on the inputted prize ball command, and further calculates the proportion. Then, the payout control board 110 outputs to the main control board 80 an output rate calculation command including information on the calculated output rate (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio). As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) can display the proportion on the proportion indicator 300 based on the inputted proportion calculation command.

As shown in FIG. 108, the main control board 80 includes a special memory 89, and the payout control board 110 includes a special payout memory 189. As described above, the special memory 89 retains its own stored contents even if the stored contents of the gaming RAM 84 are erased when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated in response to the power-on. .. Further, the special memory for payout 189 also retains its own stored contents even if the stored contents of the RAM 119 are erased when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated in response to the turning on of power. The special payout memory 189 is a volatile storage unit (DRAM), but may be a non-volatile storage unit (EEPROM, flash, or the like).

As shown in FIG. 109(B), the special memory 89 of the eighth embodiment includes a variation counter, a character ratio storage area, a continuous character ratio storage area, and a checksum storage area. Unlike the special memory 89 of the embodiment (see FIG. 11C), it does not have a 100-ball counter, an actual total prize ball count counter, a prize prize ball count counter, and a continuous prize prize ball count counter. .. Instead, as shown in FIG. 109(C), the payout special memory 189 of the eighth embodiment has a 100-ball counter, an actual total prize ball count counter, a prize prize ball count counter, and a continuous prize. It has a prize ball number counter. Although the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. 109(A) is stored in the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81, the prize ball number counter shown in FIG. 109(A) is also stored in the ROM 118 of the payout control microcomputer 116. The addition table may be stored.

[Input Processing] In the input processing (S101) of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. 110, steps S123 and S140 to S142 are replaced with steps S113 and S115 to S117 of the input processing (S101) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. It is provided. As shown in FIG. 110, the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S123 to generate a prize ball command including information capable of determining which winning opening the game ball has won based on the prize detection signal. The prize ball command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. Incidentally, in the past, the prize ball command contained only information on the number of prize balls. Therefore, in this embodiment, the prize control command 110 includes information capable of determining which winning opening has been won, so that the payout control board 110 can, based on the inputted prize ball command, the number of winning character operation prize balls. It becomes possible to measure. When it is possible to determine which winning slot has been won by only the information on the number of prize balls, the prize ball command may include only the information on the number of prize balls as in the conventional case.

In the input processing (S101), the game control microcomputer 81 proceeds to step S140, and determines whether or not the proportion calculation command is received from the payout control board 110. If not received (NO in S140), this process ends. On the other hand, if received (YES in S140), the character ratio information included in the proportion calculation command is analyzed, and the value of the character ratio is stored in the character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (S141). ). Then, the information of the continuous character ratio included in the proportion calculation command is analyzed, the value of the continuous character ratio is stored in the continuous character ratio storage area of the special memory 89 (S142), and the present process is finished. .. In this way, in the eighth mode, the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and is in the customer waiting state (YES in S2302) is satisfied by the output process (S107) shown in FIG. For example, the proportion display processing (S2304) is executed. At this time, as described above, the value of the character ratio stored in the character ratio storage area or the value of the continuous character ratio stored in the continuous character ratio storage area is displayed on the proportion display 300. ing.

[Payout Side Timer Interrupt Processing] The payout side timer interrupt processing is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of several msec (for example, 4 msec) is input to the payout control board 110. As shown in FIG. 111, the payout control microcomputer 116 first executes an input process described later (S5001). Next, based on the information contained in the prize ball command input from the main control board 80, a prize ball motor control process for driving the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 is executed (S5002). Next, based on the signal input from the card unit 135, a ball lending motor control process for driving the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending payout device 130 is executed (S5003). Then, the output process is executed (S5004). In the output process (S5004), the command (output ratio calculation command, etc.) set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 is output to the main control board 80, and a signal for driving the firing motor 113 of the firing device 112 is output to the firing control circuit. Output to 111. Next, other processing is executed (S5005), and this processing ends.

[Input Processing] As shown in FIG. 112, in the input processing (S5001), the payout control microcomputer 116 first determines whether or not a prize ball command is received. If not received (NO in S5101), the process proceeds to step S5107. On the other hand, if it has been received (YES in S5101), the information included in the prize ball command (information about the number of prize balls, information capable of determining which winning opening has been won) is analyzed (S5102). Next, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, a prize ball number setting process for setting the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (S5103). Subsequently, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, the same prize ball number counter addition process (S114, see FIG. 46) described in the first embodiment is executed (S5104). That is, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of prize winning prize balls. Next, based on the result of the prize ball number counter addition processing (S5104), the same proportion calculation processing as the proportion calculation processing (S117, see FIG. 47) described in the first embodiment is executed (S5105). That is, the payout control board 110 calculates the payout rate (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio). Then, the output rate calculation command including the calculated output rate information is set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 (S5106), and the process proceeds to step S5107.

In step S5107, it is determined whether or not a prize ball detection signal is received from the prize ball sensor 122. If it has been received (YES in S5107), prize ball measurement processing for measuring the number of prize balls actually paid out is executed (S5108). Next, it is determined whether or not a ball rental information signal is received from the card unit 135 (S5109). If it has been received (YES in S5109), the lent number setting process for setting the lent number of lent balls is executed based on the information included in the lent information signal (S5110). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a ball rental detection signal is received from the ball lending sensor 132. If it has been received (YES in S5111), a ball rental measurement process for measuring the number of actually loaned balls is executed (S5112). After that, other processing is executed (S5113), and this processing ends.

As another process (S5113), if a RAM clear notification command is received from the main control board 80, the stored contents of the RAM 119 of the payout control board 110 are erased. However, even at this time, the value of the 100-ball counter provided in the special payout memory 189 of the payout control board 110, the value of the actual total prize ball number counter, the value of the accessory prize ball number counter, and the continuous winning combination The value of the prize ball number counter is not cleared. Therefore, in the eighth embodiment, even if the payout control board 110 is made to calculate and calculate the total prize ball number and the accessory working prize ball number, the converged value is calculated as in the first embodiment. It is possible to

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth embodiment, it is possible to confirm the proportion by displaying the proportion on the proportion indicator 300. Further, the payout control board 110, which is different from the main control board 80, measures the total number of prize balls and determines the number of winning accessory working balls (number of winning prize balls, continuous) based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 80. It is possible to measure the number of prize balls. Therefore, the output rate can be displayed without imposing a measurement processing load on the main control board 80. In particular, the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 80 is conventionally included in the payout control board 110 by only including information capable of discriminating which winning slot the game ball has won. And it is possible to measure the number of prize winning ball. That is, by adding information using the existing signal line for transmitting the prize ball command, it is not necessary to cause the main control board 80 to perform measurement processing, and the load on the main control board 80 is reduced by a simple method. It is possible.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eighth mode, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total prize balls and the accessory working prize balls, and also to calculate the proportion. Then, the main control board 80 can display the proportion on the proportion display device 300 based on the proportion information included in the proportion calculation command from the payout control board 110. In this way, the output rate can be displayed without burdening the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) with not only the processing load of measurement but also the processing load of calculation of the output rate. The other operational effects of the eighth mode are substantially the same as the above-described operational effects of the first mode, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

<First Modification of Eighth Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a first modified example of the eighth mode will be described based on FIGS. 113 to 115. As shown in FIG. 113, in this first modified example, the output indicator 300 is arranged on the payout control board 110, not on the main control board 80. Then, as in the eighth embodiment described above, the payout control board 110 (the payout control microcomputer 116) is caused to perform the total prize ball number measurement, the accessory working prize ball number measurement, and the ratio calculation, and then the ratio. Is also displayed. Specifically, in the output process (S5004) of the payout side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 111, the proportion display process (S2304) as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55 can be executed.

In this first modification, as shown in FIG. 114, since the proportion indicator is not arranged on the main control board 80, the drive circuit 200F of the main control board 80 is the drive circuit 200F of the fourth embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 86, it has the same configuration as an existing drive circuit that displays game information. Further, the payout control board 110 is provided with a dedicated drive circuit 200G for displaying the output rate on the output rate indicator 300. As shown in FIG. 115, the drive circuit 200G includes a lighting selection circuit section 230G and a lighting drive circuit section 240G, and is connected to the output ratio indicator 300 arranged on the payout control board 110. The lighting selection circuit unit 230G has the same configuration as the above-described light emission selection circuit unit 210 (see FIG. 15), and the lighting drive circuit unit 240G has the same configuration as the above-described light emission drive circuit unit 220 (see FIG. 15). , Description is omitted.

As described above, according to the first modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total prize ball number and the accessory working prize ball number as well as to calculate and display the proportion. .. Therefore, it is possible to display the proportion on the proportion display 300 without burdening not only the processing burden of measurement but also the burden of calculation and display of proportion on the main control board (game control microcomputer 81). is there. Since it is not necessary to provide the output ratio indicator 300 and the circuit portion for displaying the output ratio on the main control board 80, the main control board 80 can be implemented with almost no design change. is there.

In the eighth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total prize ball number and the accessory working prize ball number, and also to calculate the proportion. However, you may change as follows. That is, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total prize ball count and the accessory working prize ball count but not to calculate the payout rate. Instead, the payout control board 110, the information of the total number of prize balls measured (the value of the actual total prize ball number counter) and the information of the number of accessory action prize balls (the value of the accessory prize ball number counter and the continuous accessory). Command including the prize ball number counter) is output to the main control board 80 by the output process of the payout side timer interrupt process (S5004, see FIG. 111). Thereby, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes the proportion calculation processing (S117, see FIG. 47) based on the command input from the payout control board 110 to calculate the proportion. .. Then, by executing the proportion display processing (S2304, refer to FIG. 54 and FIG. 55), the calculated proportion may be displayed on the proportion display device 300 on the main control board 80. In this way, the processing load of measurement and the processing load of calculating and displaying the output rate can be distributed to the payout control board 110 and the main control board 80.

<Second Modification of Eighth Mode>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a second modified example of the eighth mode will be described based on FIGS. 116 to 118. In the eighth embodiment and the first modified example thereof, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 is caused to count the measured values (the total number of prize balls and the number of prize winning prize balls) for calculating the proportion. On the other hand, in the second modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 116 of the payout control board 110 is caused to count the measurement values (total number of fired balls and total number of prize balls) for calculating the base. Has become. In the second modified example of the eighth mode, the base display 300 is arranged on the main control board 80.

In the second modified example, when the main control board 80 receives the incoming ball detection signal (including the detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a), it outputs a prize ball command to the payout control board 110. However, when the main control board 80 receives the detection signal from the outlet sensor 16a as the incoming ball detection signal, it outputs a prize ball command including information that the prize ball is “0” to the payout control board 110. In this way, the payout control board 110 measures (counts) the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls based on the inputted prize ball command, and further performs base calculation. Then, the payout control board 110 outputs to the main control board 80 a base calculation command including information on the calculated base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base). As a result, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) can display the base on the base display 300 based on the input base calculation command.

In the second modified example, the main control board 80 includes the special memory 89 and the payout control board 110 includes the special payout memory 189, as in the eighth embodiment (see FIG. 108). As shown in FIG. 116(B), the special memory 89 of the second modified example includes a normal base storage area, a time saving base storage area, a big hit base storage area, a variation counter, and a checksum storage area. .. However, unlike the special memory (see FIG. 65(C)) of the modified example of the first embodiment, a normal 100-ball counter, a normal launch ball number counter, a normal total prize ball number counter, and a time saving 100-ball counter are provided. It does not include a short-term firing ball number counter, a short-term total prize ball number counter, a jackpot 100 ball counter, a jackpot launch ball number counter, and a jackpot total prize ball number counter. Instead, these counters are provided in the payout special memory 189, as shown in FIG. 116(C). The award ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. 116(A) is stored in the ROM 83 of the game control microcomputer 81. The award ball number counter shown in FIG. 116(A) is also stored in the ROM 118 of the payout control microcomputer 116. The addition table may be stored.

[Input Processing] The input processing (S101) executed by the game control microcomputer 81 in the second modification will be described. In the input process (S101) of the second modification shown in FIG. 117, steps S112, S113, S115, S116, S151, S152 of the input process (S101) of the modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 66 are replaced by steps. S220 to S223 are provided. As shown in FIG. 117, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines in step S150 that the incoming ball detection signal has been received, it refers to the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. 116(A) (S220). Then, based on the received ball detection signal and the prize ball number counter addition table, a prize ball command including information capable of determining which ball the game ball entered is entered, and the prize ball command is generated. Is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84 (S221). At this time, for example, if the detection signal (entrance detection signal) from the outlet sensor 16a is received, the entrance and prize balls from the outlet 16 are calculated based on the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. The prize ball command including the information whose number is “0” is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 84. As described in the eighth embodiment, the prize ball command may include only the information on the number of prize balls.

When the process proceeds to step S222 in the input process (S101), it is determined whether the base calculation command is received from the payout control board 110. If not received (NO in S222), this process ends. On the other hand, if it has been received (YES in S222), the base information included in the base calculation command is analyzed, the base value is stored in the corresponding storage area of the special memory 89 (S223), and this processing is finished. .. That is, if the base operation command includes normal base information, the value of the normal base is stored in the normal base storage area, and if the base operation command includes time saving base information, the time saving base information is stored. The value is stored in the time saving base storage area, and if the base calculation command includes the jackpot base information, the jackpot base value is stored in the jackpot base storage area. Thus, in the second modified example of the eighth mode, the display condition that the gaming machine frame 50 is opened (YES in S2301) and is in the customer waiting state (YES in S2302) by the output process (S107) shown in FIG. If is satisfied, the base display process (S2340) is executed. At this time, as described in the modified example of the first embodiment, the normal base value stored in the normal base storage area, the time saving base value stored in the time saving base storage area, or the jackpot base value stored in the jackpot base storage area is stored. The value is displayed on the base display 300.

[Input Processing] The input processing (S5001) executed by the payout control microcomputer 116 in the second modification will be described. In the input process (S101) of the second modified example shown in FIG. 118, steps S5201 to S5206 are provided instead of steps S5101 to S5106 of the input process (S5101) of the eighth embodiment shown in FIG. 112. As shown in FIG. 118, in the input process (S5001), the payout control microcomputer 116 first determines whether or not a prize ball command is received. If not received (NO in S5201), the process proceeds to step S5107. On the other hand, if it has been received (YES in S5201), the information included in the prize ball command (information about the number of prize balls, information capable of determining which entrance has entered) is analyzed (S5202). .. Next, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, prize ball number setting processing for setting the prize ball number is executed (S5203). At this time, for example, if the entry into the outlet 16 is analyzed, the number of prize balls is set to "0" in the prize ball number setting process (S5203). Subsequently, based on the analysis result of the prize ball command, the same prize ball number counter addition process as the counter addition process (S151, see FIG. 67) described in the modified example of the first embodiment is executed (S5204). That is, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls. Then, based on the result of the counter addition process (S5204), the same base calculation process as the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68) described in the modification of the first embodiment is executed (S5205). That is, the payout control board 110 calculates the base (normal base, time saving base, and big hit base). Then, the base calculation command including the calculated base information is set in the output buffer of the RAM 119 (S5206), and the process proceeds to step S5107.

As described above, according to the second modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 different from the main control board 80 measures the total number of fired balls and the total prize based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 80. It is possible to measure the number of spheres. Therefore, it is possible to display the base without imposing a measurement processing load on the main control board 80. In particular, the award ball command transmitted from the main control board 80 conventionally includes only the information capable of discriminating into which ball the game ball has entered, and the payout control board 110 has a total number of shot balls. It is possible to measure and the total number of prize balls.

Further, according to the second modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls, and also to perform the base calculation. Then, the main control board 80 can display the base on the base display 300 based on the base information included in the base calculation command from the payout control board 110. In this way, it is possible to display the base without imposing not only the processing load of measurement but also the processing load of base calculation on the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). The other operational effects of the second modified example are the same as the operational effects of the eighth embodiment described above except that the output rate is changed to a base, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Third Modification of Eighth Embodiment>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the 3rd modification of an 8th form is demonstrated. In the third modified example, the base display 300 is arranged on the payout control board 110, not on the main control board 80 (see FIG. 113). Then, similarly to the second modification of the eighth embodiment described above, the payout control board 110 (payout control microcomputer 116) is caused to perform the measurement of the total number of fired balls, the measurement of the total number of prize balls, and the calculation of the base. The base is also displayed. Specifically, the base display process (S2340) as shown in FIGS. 70 to 73 can be executed in the output process (S5004) of the payout side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 111.

In the third modified example, since the base display is not arranged on the main control board 80, the drive circuit 200F of the main control board 80 is different from the drive circuit 200F of the fourth embodiment (see FIG. 86) described above. , It has the same configuration as an existing drive circuit that displays game information. Further, the payout control board 110 is provided with a dedicated drive circuit for displaying the base on the base display 300. This drive circuit is connected to the base display unit 300 arranged on the payout control board 110 and has almost the same configuration as the drive circuit 200F shown in FIG.

As described above, according to the third modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of fired balls and the total number of prize balls, and at the same time, to calculate and display the base. Therefore, it is possible to display the base on the base display 300 without burdening the main control board (game control microcomputer 81) with not only the measurement processing load but also the base calculation and display processing load. Since it is not necessary to provide the base display unit 300 and the circuit section for displaying the base on the main control board 80, the main control board can be implemented with almost no design change.

In the second modified example and the third modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls, and also to perform the base calculation. However, you may change as follows. That is, the payout control board 110 is caused to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls, but not to perform the base calculation. Instead, the payout control board 110, the information of the total number of fired balls measured (the sum of the value of the normal firing ball number counter, the value of the short-time firing ball number counter and the jackpot firing ball counter) and the total number of prize balls. Output information of the payout side timer interrupt processing (S5004, Fig. 5) (the total of the value of the normal total award ball counter, the value of the time saving total award ball counter and the value of the jackpot total award ball counter). 111), and outputs to the main control board 80. Accordingly, the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes the base calculation process (S152, see FIG. 68) based on the command input from the payout control board 110 to calculate the base. Then, the base display processing (S2340, see FIGS. 70 to 73) may be executed to display the calculated base on the base display 300 on the main control board 80. In this way, the processing load of measurement and the processing load of base calculation and display can be distributed to the payout control board 110 and the main control board 80.

<Ninth form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of the ninth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 119 to 122. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a lighting selection circuit section 230 is provided and the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output indicator 300 are connected to the lighting selection circuit section 230. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119, the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output indicator 300 are connected to the light emission selection circuit section without providing the lighting selection circuit section 230. I am trying to connect to 210A. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 119, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth embodiment, the bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of IC1, and the data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6. D7 is input respectively. Further, the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1 are connected to the input terminals IN to IN4 of the IC2 via the four signal transmission lines S1, respectively, similarly to the first embodiment described above, and the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC1 are further connected. Are respectively connected to the input terminals IN5 to IN8 of the IC2 via the four signal transmission lines S4. Then, each common signal line (each lighting common line) B1 to B4 of the output indicator 300 is connected to the output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC2. The first common signal line B1 connected to the output terminal O5 of the IC2 corresponds to the "first lighting common line", and the second common signal line B2 connected to the output terminal O6 of the IC2 is the "second lighting common line". Equivalent to "common line".

Thus, in the drive circuit 200A of the ninth mode, the input terminals 5D to 8D and the output terminals 5Q to 8Q of the IC1 in the light emission selection circuit section 210 of the first mode, and the input terminals IN5 to IN8 and the output terminals O5 to O8 of the IC2 are connected. I will make effective use of it. As a result, the light emission selection circuit unit 210A of the ninth mode can select a light emission region that can emit light among the four light emission regions 410 to 440 of the game display device 40, and can also select four light emission regions 310 of the proportion display device 300. A lighting region that can be turned on can be selected from 340.

[Game Display Processing] In the game display processing (S2303) of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 120, step S2441 is replaced with step S2404, S2412, S2420, S2427 of the game display processing (S2303) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. , S2442, S2443, S2444 are provided. As shown in FIG. 120, the game control microcomputer 81 executes step S2403 and then outputs data information D[0...7]=D[10000000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2441). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2405). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the first light emitting region 410. After executing step S2411, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[01000000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2442). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2413). As a result, the light emitting region that can emit light becomes the second light emitting region 420.

After executing step S2419, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00100000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2443). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2421). As a result, the light emitting region capable of emitting light becomes the third light emitting region 430. After executing step S2426, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00010000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2444). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2428). As a result, the light emitting region capable of emitting light becomes the fourth light emitting region 440.

[Proportion Display Processing] In the proportion display processing (S2304) of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 121, steps S2504, S2505, S2514, S2515 of the proportion display processing (S2304) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 54 are replaced. , Steps S2550, S2551, S2552, S2553 are provided. As shown in FIG. 121, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00001000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2503 (S2550). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2551). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the first lighting area 310. After executing step S2513, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00000100] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2552). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2553). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the second lighting area 320.

In the output ratio display processing (S2304) of the ninth embodiment shown in FIG. 122, steps S2554, S2555, S2555, S2534, instead of steps S2524, S2525, S2533, S2534 of the output ratio display processing (S2304) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. S2556 and S2557 are provided. As shown in FIG. 122, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...7]=D[00000010] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 after executing step S2523 (S2554). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2555). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the third lighting area 330. After executing step S2532, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[00000001] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S2556). Then, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2557). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on becomes the fourth lighting area 340.

In this ninth mode, the data information D[10000000], the data information D[01000000], the data information D[0010000], and the data information D[00010000] output from the game control microcomputer 81 to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A are It corresponds to one signal. Further, the data information D[00001000], the data information D[00000100], the data information D[00000010], and the data information D[00000001] that the game control microcomputer 81 outputs to the light emission selection circuit unit 210A correspond to the second signal. .. A state in which a light emitting area capable of emitting light is selected by the first signal corresponds to the game display state. A state in which a lighting region that can be turned on by the second signal is selected corresponds to the proportion display state (specific display state).

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the ninth mode, if the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the first signal to the light emission selection circuit section 210A (IC1) by the drive circuit 200A shown in FIG. 119, the game display state is achieved. Then, it is possible to display the game information relating to the progress of the game on the game display 40. On the other hand, if the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the second signal to the light emission selection circuit section 210A, it becomes a proportion display state, and the proportion display unit 300 can display the proportion. Thus, while using the existing light emission selection circuit unit (IC1, IC2) and light emission drive circuit unit (IC3, IC4) for displaying on the game display 40, the software control output by the game control microcomputer 81. By switching, it is possible to selectively display the game information and the proportion. That is, unlike the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, without adding the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting drive circuit unit 220X for displaying the proportion, the proportion display unit 300 has a simple circuit configuration. It is possible to display the percentage. In short, since there is no new IC to be added to the existing drive circuit, the drive circuit 200A of the ninth mode can be easily mounted on the main control board 80. The other operational effects of the ninth mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the first mode described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of ninth embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a modified example of the ninth mode will be described. In the ninth mode, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first mode is replaced with the drive circuit 200A (see FIG. 119), and the output ratio is displayed on the output ratio indicator 300. On the other hand, in the modification of the ninth embodiment, the drive circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment is replaced with the drive circuit 200A, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is different from the operational effect of the ninth embodiment described above only in that the output rate is changed to a base, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Tenth form>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 125. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, a lighting selection circuit section 230 is provided and the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output indicator 300 are connected to the lighting selection circuit section 230. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200B of the tenth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123, the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output ratio indicator 300 are connected to the connector CN2 and emit light without providing the lighting selection circuit section 230. The common signal lines A1 to A4 between the selection circuit unit 210 and the selection circuit unit 210 are branched and provided. The first common signal line B1 branched from the first common signal line (first light emission common line) A1 corresponds to the “first branch common line”, and the second common signal line (second light emission common line) A2. The second common signal line B2 that branches is equivalent to a “second branch common line”. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the drive circuit 200B of the tenth mode, the light emission selection circuit unit 210 can select a light emission region that can emit light among the four light emission regions 410 to 440 of the game display device 40, and four light emission regions of the proportion display device 300. A lighting region that can be turned on can be selected from 310 to 340. However, the signals (common signals) output from the output terminals O1 to O4 of the IC2 are transmitted to the light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display 40 via the common signal lines A1 to A4, and the common signals are transmitted. It is transmitted to each lighting region 310 to 340 of the proportion display device 300 via the lines B1 to B4. Therefore, the light emitting area is selected at the same time as the light emitting area is selected, and the light emitting area is selected at the same time as the light emitting area is selected.

Then, as in the first embodiment, the respective data signal lines Ba to Bh of the output indicator 300 are provided so as to branch from the respective data signal lines Aa to Ah between the connector CN2 and the light emission drive circuit section 220. .. Therefore, when displaying the game information on the game display 40, the light emission mode on the game display 40 is reflected as it is on the proportion display 300, and when the proportion is displayed on the proportion display 300, The lighting mode on the proportion display device 300 is directly reflected on the game display device 40.

[Proportion Display Processing] In the proportion display processing (S2304) of the tenth embodiment shown in FIG. 124, instead of steps S2505 and S2515 of the proportion display processing (S2304) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 54, steps S2560, S2561 is provided. As shown in FIG. 124, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data level D[0...3]=D[1000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2504, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2560). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on is selected as the first lighting area 310, but the first light emitting area 410 is also selected. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level after outputting the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2514. (S2561). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on is selected as the second lighting area 320, but the second light emitting area 420 is also selected.

In the tenth form proportion display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. 125, steps S2562 and S2563 are provided in place of steps S2525 and S2534 of the first form proportion display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. 55. .. As shown in FIG. 125, in step S2524, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2562). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on is selected as the third lighting area 330, but the third light emitting area 430 is also selected. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level after outputting the data information D[0...3]=D[0001] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2533. (S2563). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on is selected as the fourth lighting area 340, but the fourth light emitting area 440 is also selected.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the tenth embodiment, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game display processing (S2303) shown in FIG. 53, a meaningless display is made on the proportion display device 300. It is possible to display the game information relating to the progress of the game on the game display device 40. If the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the proportion display processing (S2304) shown in FIG. 124 and FIG. 125, although the meaning is not displayed on the game display 40, the proportion is displayed on the proportion display 300. It is possible to

According to the drive circuit 200B of the tenth form, as in the case of the ninth form described above, the existing light emission selection circuit unit (IC1, IC2) and the light emission drive circuit unit (IC3) for performing display on the game display 40. It is possible to selectively display the game information and the proportion by switching the software control output by the game control microcomputer 81 while using the IC4). That is, unlike the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, without adding the lighting selection circuit unit 210X and the lighting drive circuit unit 220X for displaying the proportion, the proportion display unit 300 has a simple circuit configuration. It is possible to display the percentage.

Here, in the tenth embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode when the game information is displayed on the game display 40 is reflected on the proportion display 300, and the lighting mode when the proportion is displayed on the proportion display 300. Is reflected on the game display 40, but this is not a problem. That is, as described in the first embodiment, the display condition for displaying the participation rate on the participation rate display device 300 is that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and is in a customer waiting state. Therefore, during the game by the player, the game information is displayed on the game display 40 because the game machine frame 50 is normally closed. At this time, even if the light emission mode of the game display device 40 is reflected in the proportion display device 300, there is no problem because the proportion display device 300 cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 50 is opened and the proportion is checked, the customer wait state is set. At this time, even if the lighting mode of the proportion display unit 300 is reflected in the game display unit 40, there is no problem because the game is not being played. The other operational effects of the tenth mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the first mode described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of Tenth Embodiment>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the modification of the 10th form is explained. In the tenth mode, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first mode is replaced with the drive circuit 200B (see FIG. 123), and the output ratio is displayed on the output ratio indicator 300. On the other hand, in the modification of the tenth embodiment, the drive circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment is replaced with the drive circuit 200B, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is different from the operational effect of the tenth embodiment described above only in that the output rate is changed to a base, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Eleventh form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eleventh embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 126 to 128. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the data signal lines Ba to Bh of the output ratio indicator 300 are connected to the data signal lines Aa to between the connector CN2 and the light emission drive circuit unit 220. It is provided by branching from Ah. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the lighting drive circuit section 240 is provided to drive the data signal lines (data lines) Ba to Bh of the output indicator 300 to light. It is designed to be connected to the circuit section 240. In the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh form, the lighting drive circuit unit 240 is provided instead of the lighting selection circuit unit 230 of the first form. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

In the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh mode, as shown in FIG. 126, the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the output ratio indicator 300 are connected to the common signal lines A1 to A4 between the connector CN2 and the light emission selection circuit section 210. It is provided by branching from. Therefore, the light emission selection circuit unit 210 can select a light emitting area that can emit light among the four light emitting areas 410 to 440 of the game display 40, and can also light up among the four lighting areas 310 to 340 of the proportion display 300. The lighting area can be selected. The first common signal line B1 branched from the first common signal line (first light emission common line) A1 corresponds to the “first branch common line”, and the second common signal line (second light emission common line) A2. The branched second common signal line B2 corresponds to the “second branched common line”.

Based on the data information D[0...7], the lighting drive circuit unit 240 selects eight output lighting units in the lighting regions selected by the light emission selection circuit unit 210 among the four lighting regions 310 to 340. It is a circuit for enabling lighting. The lighting drive circuit section 240 includes a flip-flop (IC7) and a transistor array (IC8).

The IC 7 is a D-type flip-flop similar to the IC 3 of the light emission drive circuit unit 220. The bus line BL is connected to the input terminals 1D to 8D of the IC 7 so that the data information D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7 are input respectively. On the other hand, eight signal transmission lines S5 are connected to the output terminals 1Q to 8Q of the IC 7, respectively. The reset signal RST can be input to the clear input terminal CLR of the IC 7. The select signal XCSE10 (see FIG. 14) from the game control microcomputer 81 is input to the clock input terminal CLK of the IC7.

The IC8 is a driver similar to the IC4 of the light emission drive circuit unit 220. Eight signal transmission lines S5 are connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN8 of the IC8. On the other hand, the data signal lines Ba to Bh from the first data signal line Ba to the eighth data signal line Bh are connected to the output terminals O1 to O8 of the IC8. These data signal lines Ba to Bh are respectively connected to the eight lighting units for output ratio (see FIG. 13) included in each lighting region 310 to 340 of the output ratio indicator 300 via the current limiting resistance RC.

[Proportion Rate Display Processing] In the proportion display processing (S2304) of the eleventh embodiment shown in FIG. 127, steps S2503, S2505, S2509, S2513, S2515, and S2515 of the proportion display processing (S2304) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Instead of S2519, steps S2570, S2571, S2572, S2573, S2574, S2575 are provided. As shown in FIG. 127, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the select signal XCSE10 after outputting the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2502. The level is switched to "H" level (S2570). As a result, the lighting state in the fourth lighting region 340 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Then, in step S2504, after the data information D[0... 3]=D[1000] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2571). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on is selected as the first lighting area 310, but the first light emitting area 410 is also selected. However, in the eleventh embodiment, after executing step S2507 or S2508, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2572). As a result, the tens digit of the output rate (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio) is displayed in the selected first lighting region 310, and the lighting mode in the first lighting region 310 is selected in the selected first light emitting region 410. Is never reflected.

Further, in step S2512, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “H” level. Switch to (S2573). As a result, the lighting state in the first lighting region 310 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. In step S2514, after the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2574). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on is selected as the second lighting area 320, but the second light emitting area 420 is also selected. However, in the eleventh embodiment, after executing step S2517 or S2518, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2575). Accordingly, the first place of the output ratio is displayed in the selected second lighting region 320, and the lighting mode in the second lighting region 320 is not reflected in the selected second light emitting region 420.

In the proportion display process (S2304) of the eleventh form shown in FIG. 128, steps S2523, S2525, S2529, S2532, S2534, and S2539 of the first form shown in FIG. S2576, S2577, S2578, S2579, S2580, S2581 are provided. As shown in FIG. 128, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data signal D[0...7]=D[0...0] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 and then outputs the select signal XCSE10 in step S2522. The level is switched to "H" level (S2576). As a result, the lighting state in the second lighting region 320 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Then, in step S2524, after the data information D[0...3]=D[0010] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the "H" level (S2577). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on is selected as the third lighting area 330, but the third light emitting area 430 is also selected. However, in the eleventh embodiment, after executing step S2527 or S2528, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2578). As a result, “1” or “2” is displayed in the selected third lighting region 330, and the lighting mode in the third lighting region 330 is not reflected in the selected third light emitting region 430.

Further, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data level D[0...7]=D[0...0] from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 in step S2531, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “H” level. Switch to (S2579). As a result, the lighting state in the third lighting region 330 of the previous time (4 ms before) is not reflected. Then, in step S2533, after the data information D[0...3]=D[0001] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, the output level of the select signal XCSE0 is switched to the “H” level (S2580). As a result, the lighting area that can be turned on is selected as the fourth lighting area 340, but the fourth light emitting area 440 is also selected. However, in the eleventh embodiment, after executing step S2536 or S2537, the output level of the select signal XCSE10 is switched to the “H” level (S2581). As a result, “0” or “1” is displayed in the selected fourth lighting region 340, and the lighting mode in the fourth lighting region 340 is not reflected in the selected fourth light emitting region 440.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the eleventh aspect, if the game control microcomputer 81 executes the game display processing (S2303) shown in FIG. 53, the game display 40 displays the game information relating to the progress of the game. It is possible. If the gaming control microcomputer 81 executes the proportion display processing (S2304) shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, the proportion display unit 300 can display the proportion. Then, according to the drive circuit 200C of the eleventh aspect, with respect to the existing light emission selection circuit section 210 (IC1, IC2) and the light emission drive circuit section 220 (IC3, IC4) for performing display on the game display 40, It can be configured by simply adding the lighting drive circuit section 240 (IC7, IC8). That is, unlike the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35, it is not necessary to newly add both the lighting selection circuit section 210X and the lighting drive circuit section 220X for displaying the output rate. Thus, according to the eleventh aspect, the display of the game information and the display of the proportion are selected with a simple circuit configuration by switching the software control output by the game control microcomputer 81 and adding the lighting drive circuit section 240. It can be done in one step. The other operational effects of the eleventh mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first mode, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of Eleventh Embodiment>
The pachinko game machine 1 of the modification of the 11th form is explained. In the eleventh mode, the drive circuit 200 (see FIG. 15) of the first mode is replaced with the drive circuit 200C (see FIG. 126), and the output ratio is displayed on the output ratio indicator 300. On the other hand, in the modification of the eleventh embodiment, the drive circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment is replaced with the drive circuit 200C, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is different from the operational effect of the eleventh embodiment described above only in that the output rate is changed to the base, and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

<Twelfth form>
The twelfth mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 133. In the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the lighting selection circuit unit 230 is configured to include IC5 (flip-flop) and IC6 (transistor array) as an integrated circuit. On the other hand, in the drive circuit 200D of the twelfth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the lighting selection circuit section 250 is configured to include only the IC 6 as an integrated circuit. Hereinafter, the points different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

There are provided signal transmission lines S11 branched from the signal transmission line S1 connected to the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of the IC1 and the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC2, respectively. The signal transmission line S11 is connected to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC 6, respectively. Therefore, IC2 can transmit signals to the common signal lines A1 to A4 of the game display 40 based on the signals output from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of IC1, and IC6 also outputs from the output terminals 1Q to 4Q of IC1. A signal can be transmitted to the common signal lines B1 to B4 of the game display 40 based on the signal. However, in this case, if the signal transmission line S1 and the signal transmission line S11 are always in a conductive state, as in the tenth embodiment described above (see FIG. 123), a light emission mode when displaying game information on the game display 40. Is reflected on the proportion display 300, and the lighting mode when the proportion is displayed on the proportion display 300 is reflected on the game display 40. Therefore, in the twelfth mode, the switch circuit unit 260 is provided in the signal transmission line S1 and the signal transmission line S11 in order to deal with the above-described problem.

The switch circuit section 260 can switch the signal transmission line S1 to a conducting state or a non-conducting state, and can switch the signal transmission line S11 to a conducting state or a non-conducting state. Then, the switch circuit section 260 switches the signal transmission line (first signal line) S1 to the conductive state, switches the signal transmission line (second signal line) S11 to the non-conductive state, and switches the signal transmission line S11 to the non-conductive state. When switching to the non-conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is switched to the conducting state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the switch circuit unit 260 includes a first switch unit 261 on the signal transmission line S1 and a second switch unit 262 on the signal transmission line S11. The first switch unit 261 includes an N-type MOSFET (TR1) and a P-type MOSFET (TR11) that switch the connection state (connected or disconnected) between the output terminal 1Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN1 of IC2. , N-type MOSFET (TR2) and P-type MOSFET (TR12) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 2Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN2 of IC2, and the connection state of the output terminal 3Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN3 of IC2. N-type MOSFET (TR3) and P-type MOSFET (TR13) for switching between, and N-type MOSFET (TR4) and P-type MOSFET (TR14) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 4Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN4 of IC2. ), a first inverter INV1 and a second inverter INV2.

The second switch section 262 includes an N-type MOSFET (TR5) and a P-type MOSFET (TR15) that switch the connection state between the output terminal 1Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN1 of IC6, and the output terminals 2Q and IC6 of IC1. N-type MOSFET (TR6) and P-type MOSFET (TR16) for switching the connection state with the input terminal IN2, and N-type MOSFET (TR7) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 3Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN3 of IC6. A P-type MOSFET (TR17), an N-type MOSFET (TR8) and a P-type MOSFET (TR18) for switching the connection state between the output terminal 4Q of IC1 and the input terminal IN4 of IC6, and the third inverter INV3. I have it.

Specifically, in the first switch unit 261 and the second switch unit 262, the drain terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4, TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFET (TR11, (TR12, TR13, TR14, TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18) source terminals are connected, and the pull-up resistor Ra is connected to this side. On the opposite side, the source terminal of the N-type MOSFET and the drain terminal of the P-type MOSFET are connected.

In the first switch unit 261, the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4) have the level of the level of the select signal XCSE10 inverted twice by the first inverter INV1 and the second inverter INV2. A signal is input. Further, in the first switch unit 261, the gate terminal of the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14) is inputted with the signal of the level obtained by inverting the level of the select signal XCSE10 once by the first inverter INV1. ..

In addition, in the second switch unit 262, a signal having a level obtained by inverting the level of the select signal XCSE10 once by the third inverter INV3 is input to the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8). .. Further, in the second switch section 262, the select signal XCSE10 is input as it is to the gate terminals of the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18).

In this way, in the first switch section 261 and the second switch section 262, an "H" level signal is input to the gate terminals of the N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4, TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8). (That is, the gate voltage (gate-source voltage) becomes “L” level (voltage higher than the upper threshold voltage)) and P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14, TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18). When a signal of “L” level is input to the gate terminal of () (that is, when the gate voltage becomes “L” level (a voltage lower than the lower threshold voltage), a sufficient current flows between the drain and source of each MOSFET. Comes to flow. That is, the signal transmission line S1 or the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive.

On the contrary, an “L” level signal is input to the gate terminal of the N-type MOSFET (that is, the gate voltage becomes “L” level) and an “H” level signal is input to the P-type MOSFET gate terminal. When a signal is input (that is, when the gate voltage becomes “H” level), sufficient current cannot flow between the drain and source of each MOSFET. That is, the signal transmission line S1 or the signal transmission line S11 becomes non-conductive.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “H” level (first level), the N type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3) in the first switch section 261. , TR4) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14) are supplied with the "L" level signal, the signal transmission line S1 is turned on. Become. At this time, in the second switch section 262, the "L" level signal is input to the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18). Since the signal of "H" level is input to the signal transmission line S11, the signal transmission line S11 becomes non-conductive.

On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “L” level (second level), in the first switch section 261, N-type MOSFETs (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4) ) Is input to the P-type MOSFETs (TR11, TR12, TR13, TR14), and a signal of "H" level is input to the signal transmission line S1. .. Further, at this time, in the second switch section 262, the "H" level signal is input to the N-type MOSFETs (TR5, TR6, TR7, TR8) and the P-type MOSFETs (TR15, TR16, TR17, TR18). Since the signal of "L" level is input to the signal transmission line S11, the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive.

Thus, in the drive circuit 200D of the twelfth form, the switch circuit section 260 is configured by a combination of two MOSFETs of different types. Therefore, it is possible to increase the reliability of communication between the game control microcomputer 81 and IC2 and IC6. That is, since the switch circuit section 260 is configured by combining both N-type and P-type MOSFETs, switching operation is possible in the range of 0V to Vcc. Therefore, it is easier to set the input voltage to the input terminals IN1 to IN4 of the IC2 and IC6 to a level at which the switch circuit unit normally operates, as compared with the case where the switch circuit unit is configured by only one of P-type and N-type MOSFETs. It is possible.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the twelfth embodiment shown in FIG. 131, steps S2306 and S2307 are newly added to the output processing (S107) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 131, when the gaming machine frame 50 is closed (NO in S2301) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the output level of the select signal XCSE10. Is set to the “H” level. As a result, the signal transmission line S1 becomes conductive, while the signal transmission line S11 becomes non-conductive. Then, a game display process is executed to display the game information on the game display 40 (S2303). On the other hand, if the gaming machine frame 50 is open (YES in S2301) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the gaming control microcomputer 81 sets the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to " Set to "L" level. As a result, the signal transmission line S1 becomes non-conductive, whereas the signal transmission line S11 becomes conductive. Then, in order to display the proportion on the proportion display device 300, proportion display processing is executed (S2304).

[Proportion Display Processing] In the output display processing (S2304) of the twelfth embodiment shown in FIG. 132, instead of steps S2505 and S2515 of the display processing (S2304) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 54, steps S2590, S2591 is provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data level D[0...3]=D[1000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 at step S2504, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2590). At this time, although the signal transmission line S11 is in the conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is in the non-conducting state. Therefore, the lighting region that can be lighted is the first lighting region 310, and the first light emitting region 410 is not selected. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level after outputting the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2514. (S2591). At this time as well, although the signal transmission line S11 is in the conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is in the non-conducting state, so the lighting region that can be turned on is the second lighting region 320, and the second light emitting region 420 is not selected.

In the proportion display process (S2304) of the twelfth form shown in FIG. 133, steps S2592 and S2593 are provided instead of steps S2525 and S2534 of the proportion display process (S2304) of the first form shown in FIG. 55. .. As shown in FIG. 133, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data level D[0...3]=D[0010] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2524, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S2592). At this time, although the signal transmission line S11 is in the conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is in the non-conducting state. Therefore, the lighting region capable of lighting is the third lighting region 330, and the third light emitting region 430 is not selected. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level after outputting the data information D[0...3]=D[0001] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S2533. (S2593). At this time as well, although the signal transmission line S11 is in the conducting state, the signal transmission line S1 is in the non-conducting state, so the lighting region that can be lighted is the fourth lighting region 340, and the fourth light emitting region 440 is not selected.

The game display process (S2303) of the twelfth form is the same as the game display process (S2303) of the first form shown in FIG. However, when the game display process (S2303) of the twelfth form is executed, as described above, the signal transmission line S1 is in the conducting state, but the signal transmission line S11 is in the non-conducting state. Contrary to (S2304), each light emitting area 410 to 440 is selected, whereas each lighting area 310 to 340 is not selected.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the twelfth form, as shown in FIG. 129, the drive circuit 200D is provided with the switch circuit section 260. As a result, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE10 to the “H” level or the “L” level, and the light emission selection circuit section 210 selects a light emitting area in which the light emission area can be emitted or is turned on. It is possible to switch to the output ratio display state in which a lighting region that the selection circuit unit 250 can light up is selected. That is, it is possible to selectively display the game display 40 and the proportion display 300 by the switch circuit unit 260, and the game display 40 can be displayed as in the tenth embodiment. It is possible to prevent the light emission mode from being reflected on the proportion display device 300 and the lighting mode on the proportion display device 300 from being reflected on the game display device 40. The other operational effects of the twelfth mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first mode, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of 12th embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a modified example of the twelfth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth mode, the drive circuit 200 of the first mode (see FIG. 15) is replaced with the drive circuit 200D (see FIG. 129) including the switch circuit section 260 (see FIG. 130), and the output is displayed on the proportion indicator 300. I tried to display the rate. On the other hand, in the modification of the twelfth embodiment, the drive circuit 200 of the modification of the first embodiment is replaced with the drive circuit 200D including the switch circuit unit 260, and the base is displayed on the base display 300. Has been done. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is different from the operational effect of the twelfth embodiment described above only in that the output rate is changed to the base, and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

<13th form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the thirteenth embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 134 to 137. In the first embodiment, the proportion display device 300 is provided, and the proportion display device 300 displays the proportion. On the other hand, in the thirteenth form, the proportion indicator 300 is not provided, and the proportion is displayed on the game indicator 40F. That is, the thirteenth form is characterized in that it is possible to display the game information relating to the progress of the game and also the proportion, with one display device called the game display device 40F. This game display 40F is arranged on the right side of the game board 2 (a plate-shaped member of the game board 2) like the game display 40 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 3). Therefore, when the gaming display 40F displays the proportion, it is possible to confirm the proportion from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 134, in the game display device 40F of the thirteenth mode, the first light emitting region 410F and the second light emitting region 420F are not so-called 7-segment, and the first of the game display device 40 of the first mode. Similar to the light emitting area 410 and the second light emitting area 420 (see FIG. 5), the gaming light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 and LA9 to LA16 are arranged. This is because it is difficult to determine the type of the big hit symbol in the light emitting mode in the first light emitting area 410F (first special symbol display 41a) and the second light emitting area 420F (second special symbol display 41b). .. On the other hand, the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F are so-called 7-segment, and like the third lighting region 330 and the fourth lighting region 340 of the proportion display device 300 of the first embodiment (see FIG. 8), each of the gaming light emitting portions LA17 to LA24, LA25 to LA32 are arranged. This is for displaying the numerical output (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio) in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440.

The drive circuit of the thirteenth form has the same configuration as an existing drive circuit that displays game information, like the drive circuit 200F of the fourth form (see FIG. 86) described above. That is, unlike the drive circuit 200 of the first embodiment, a circuit unit for displaying the output rate is not newly added. Therefore, the existing drive circuit for displaying the game information is used as it is, and the output rate is displayed. In the thirteenth form, as described above, the output rate is indicated by the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F of the game display 40F. And, whether it is the character ratio or the continuous character ratio is indicated by the first light emitting region 410F of the game display 40F, and whether the ratio is the effective value or the reference value is the game display. The second light emitting region 420F of 40F is used.

However, as shown in FIG. 111, since the first light emitting region 410F and the second light emitting region 420F are not so-called 7-segment, numbers are not shown. Therefore, in the 111th embodiment, if all the game light emitting portions LA1 to LA8 of the first light emitting region 410F emit light, the accessory ratio is indicated. On the other hand, if all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410F are not emitting light (when they are off), the continuous winning role ratio is indicated. Further, if all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420F are emitting light, the percentage of output as an effective value is shown. On the other hand, if all the game light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting area 420F are not emitting light (when they are off), the output rate as a reference value is shown.

[Proportion Rate Display Processing] In the proportion display processing (S2304) of the thirteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 135, steps S2504, S2505, S2514, and S2515 of the proportion display processing (S2304) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 54 are replaced. , Steps S3001, S3002, S3003, S3004 are provided. As shown in FIG. 135, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the data level D[0...3]=D[0010] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3001, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S3001). As a result, the light emitting area that can be turned on (emits light) becomes the third light emitting area 430F. After executing step S2507 or S2508, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2509). As a result, the tenth place of the output rate (characteristic ratio or continuous characterizing ratio) is displayed in the third light emitting region 430F. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level after outputting the data information D[0...3]=D[0001] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3003. (S3004). As a result, the light emitting area that can be turned on (emits light) becomes the fourth light emitting area 440F. After executing step S2517 or S2518, the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2519). As a result, the first place of the output rate is displayed in the fourth light emitting region 440F.

In the ratio display process (S2304) of the thirteenth mode shown in FIG. 136, steps S2524, S2525, S2527, S2528, S2533, S2534, S2538, and S2538 of the ratio display process (S2304) of the first mode shown in FIG. 55 are performed. Instead, steps S3005, S3006, S3007, S3008, S3009, S3010, S3011, S3012 are provided. As shown in FIG. 136, in step S3005, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs data information D[0...3]=D[1000] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3, and then sets the output level of the select signal XCSE0. Switch to "H" level (S3006). As a result, the light emitting area that can be turned on (emits light) becomes the first light emitting area 410F.

If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2526), the data information D[0...7]=D[1...1] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S3007), and the select signal XCSE1 is output. The output level of is switched to the “H” level (S2529). As a result, all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410F emit light, and the proportion displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F is the accessory ratio. Be done. On the other hand, if the display flag is not "1" (NO in S2526), the data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] is output from the input/output terminals D0 to D7 (S3008), The output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the "H" level (S2529). As a result, all the game light emitting units LA1 to LA8 in the first light emitting region 410F do not emit light, and the proportion displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440F is the continuous winning role ratio. Is shown.

Further, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the output level of the select signal XCSE0 to the “H” level after outputting the data information D[0...3]=D[0100] from the input/output terminals D0 to D3 in step S3009. (S3010). As a result, the light emitting region that can be turned on (emits light) becomes the second light emitting region 420F. If the value of the actual total prize ball counter is "100" or more (YES in S2535) or the value of the variation counter is "3000" or more (YES in S2537), the data information is input from the input/output terminals D0 to D7. D[0...7]=D[1...1] is output (S3011), and the output level of the select signal XCSE1 is switched to the “H” level (S2539). As a result, all the game light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting area 420F emit light, and the proportions displayed in the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F are shown to be effective values. .. On the other hand, if the value of the actual total prize ball number counter is less than "100" (NO in S2535) and the value of the fluctuation number counter is less than "3000" (NO in S2537), the input/output terminal D0 ~D7 outputs data information D[0...7]=D[0...0] (S3012), and switches the output level of the select signal XCSE1 to "H" level (S2539). As a result, all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 in the second light emitting region 420F do not emit light, and the percentages displayed in the third light emitting region 430F and the fourth light emitting region 440 are shown as reference values. Be done.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the thirteenth aspect, it is possible to display the participation rate using the game display 40F that displays the game information related to the progress of the game. In other words, it is not necessary to newly provide a dedicated display device or electric circuit (drive circuit) to display the output rate, and only the software change to the game control microcomputer 81 is required. Therefore, it is possible to display the output rate with almost no design change from the existing pachinko gaming machine 1. In other words, it is possible to prevent the design change for displaying the output rate from taking a very large amount of cost and labor. Further, the game display device 40F is not arranged on the back side of the game machine frame 50 as in the above-described embodiments, but is arranged on the game board 2. Therefore, the proportion displayed on the game display 40F can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the proportion can be easily confirmed. The other operational effects of the thirteenth mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first mode, and therefore description thereof is omitted.

<Modification of thirteenth embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a modified example of the thirteenth aspect will be described. In the thirteenth form, the proportion display device 300 for displaying the proportion is not provided, and the proportion is displayed on the game display 40F (see FIG. 134). On the other hand, in the modification of the thirteenth embodiment, the base display 300 for displaying the base is not provided, and the base is displayed on the game display 40F. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134, a numerical base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is displayed in the third light emitting area 430F and the fourth light emitting area 440F of the game display 40F.

Then, when displaying the normal base, one game light emitting portion LA1 is caused to emit light in the first light emitting area 410F of the game display 40F. Further, when displaying the time saving base, the two game light emitting portions LA1 and LA2 are caused to emit light in the first light emitting region 410F of the game display 40F. When displaying the jackpot base, the three game light emitting portions LA1, LA2, LA3 are caused to emit light in the first light emitting area 410F of the game display 40F. Furthermore, when displaying the base as an effective value, all the game light emitting units LA9 to LA16 are caused to emit light in the second light emitting area 420F of the game display 40F. On the other hand, when displaying the base as a reference value, all the game light emitting portions LA9 to LA16 are not made to emit light (light is turned off) in the second light emitting area 420F of the game display 40F. Note that the above-described light emitting mode is merely an example, and can be changed as appropriate. The operational effect of the modified example in this case is different from the operational effect of the thirteenth embodiment described above only in that the output rate is changed to the base, and therefore detailed description will be omitted.

<Fourteenth form>
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourteenth embodiment will be described based on FIG. 137. In the first embodiment, the display condition for displaying the output ratio on the output display 300 is that the gaming machine frame 50 is open and is in the customer waiting state. On the other hand, in the fourteenth mode, the display condition is that the RAM clear switch (RAM clear operation means) 152 has been operated and the customer is in a waiting state.

[Output Processing] In the output processing (S107) of the fourteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 137, step S2314 is provided instead of step S2301 of the output processing (S107) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 137, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2314). The display flag is switched to either "1" or "2" by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 as described above. If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2314) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the proportion display processing is executed (S2304). On the other hand, if the display flag is "2" (NO in S2314) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the game display processing is executed (S2303). Although the display flag is set to "1" in the initial setting, the display flag is switched to "2" immediately after the power is turned on by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on. Therefore, at this time, the game display process (S2303) is performed.

In this way, the person who confirms the proportion can wait for the customer to wait, wait for the gaming machine frame 50 to open, and then operate the RAM clear switch 152 to display the proportion on the proportion display device 300. It is possible. Even when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated except when the power is turned on, the information stored in the game RAM 84 is not cleared. In the fourteenth mode, unlike the first mode, the display of the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are not switched by operating the RAM clear switch 152, and every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute). The display of the character ratio and the display of the continuous character ratio are automatically switched.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the fourteenth aspect, by operating the RAM clear switch 152, it is possible to display the proportion only when it is desired to confirm the proportion. The RAM clear switch 152 is usually operated only when the power is turned on. Therefore, according to the fourteenth aspect, in consideration of the fact that the design change becomes large when the operation means for displaying the output rate is newly provided in the main control board 80 or other parts, the existing one not used after the power is turned on. The RAM clear switch 152 is effectively used. Therefore, it is possible to display the output ratio arbitrarily while reducing design changes. The other operational effects of the fourteenth mode are substantially the same as the operational effects of the above-described first mode, and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

<Modification of Fourteenth Embodiment>
A pachinko gaming machine 1 of a modified example of the fourteenth embodiment will be described based on FIG. 138. In the fourteenth mode, the display condition for displaying the proportion on the proportion display device 300 is that the RAM clear switch 152 is operated and the customer is in a waiting state. On the other hand, in the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, the display condition for displaying the base on the base display 300 is that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated and the customer is in the waiting state. ..

[Output Processing] As shown in FIG. 138, in the output processing (S107) of the modification of the fourteenth embodiment, step S2350 is replaced with step S2301 of the output processing (S107) of the modification of the first embodiment shown in FIG. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 138, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the display flag is "1" (S2314). In the modified example of the fourteenth mode, unlike the modified example of the first mode described above, the display flag is switched to either "1" or "2" by operating the RAM clear switch 152. If the display flag is "1" (YES in S2350) and the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S2302), the base display process is executed (S2340). On the other hand, if the display flag is "2" (NO in S2340) or the customer waiting flag is OFF (NO in S2302), the game display processing is executed (S2303). Although the display flag is set to "1" in the initial setting, the display flag is switched to "2" immediately after the power is turned on by the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 when the power is turned on.

Thus, the person who confirms the base can display the base on the base display 300 by waiting for the customer to wait and opening the gaming machine frame 50 and then operating the RAM clear switch 152. .. In the modified example of the fourteenth mode, unlike the modified example of the first mode, the operation of the RAM clear switch 152 does not switch between the normal base display, the time saving base display and the jackpot base display. The display of the normal base, the display of the time saving base, and the display of the jackpot base are automatically switched every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

As described above, according to the modified example of the fourteenth embodiment, it is possible to display the base only by confirming the base by operating the RAM clear switch 152. In particular, if the operation means for displaying the base is newly provided on the main control board 80 or other parts, the design change becomes large. Therefore, by effectively using the existing RAM clear switch 152 which is not used after the power is turned on, It is possible to display the base arbitrarily while reducing design changes. The operational effects of the other modified examples are the same as the operational effects of the fourteenth embodiment described above except that the output rate is changed to the base, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Other modifications>
In each of the above-described modes and the modifications thereof, the gaming machine frame 50 opens the display condition for displaying the ratio on the ratio display 300 or the display condition for displaying the base on the base display 300. In addition, it is determined that the customer is in a waiting state or that the RAM clear switch 152 has been operated and is in a waiting state. However, the display conditions can be changed as appropriate, for example, only opening the gaming machine frame 50, waiting for customers, or only operating the RAM clear switch 152, or opening the gaming machine frame 50 and waiting for customers. In addition, the RAM clear switch 152 may be operated. Further, a new switch (operation means) may be provided on the back side of the gaming machine frame 50, and the display condition may be that the switch is operated. Further, the display condition may be that a specific operation (for example, an operation in a certain setting screen) is performed with the effect button 63 or the select button 64 (operation means).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and the modifications thereof, the light emission selection circuit sections 210 and 210A are configured to include two integrated circuits (IC1 and IC2). However, the light emission selection circuit unit may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuit ICs. Further, the light emission drive circuit unit 220 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC3, IC4). However, the light emission drive circuit unit may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuit ICs. Further, the lighting selection circuit unit 230 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC5 and IC6), and the lighting selection circuit unit 250 is configured to include one integrated circuit (IC6). However, the lighting selection circuit unit may be configured to include three or more integrated circuit ICs. Further, the lighting drive circuit section 240 is configured to include two integrated circuits (IC7, IC8). However, the lighting drive circuit unit may be configured to include one or three or more integrated circuit ICs.

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modified examples thereof, as the game display 40, one in which the respective game light emitting portions LA1 to LA32 are arranged as shown in FIG. 5 is used. However, the game display is not limited to that shown in FIG. 5, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the game display may be one in which each light emitting unit is arranged as shown in FIG. 139. Further, the game display may be a so-called 4 continuous 7 segment as shown in FIG. In this case, as described in the thirteenth embodiment, it is possible to show the output ratio or the base as a numerical value when displaying the output ratio on the game display device (4 consecutive 7 segments).

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modified examples thereof, the game display 40 emits light corresponding to a total of 32 bits of 4 common×8 (N=8) bits. However, for example, only the first light emitting region 410 and the second light emitting region 420 may be provided, and light may be emitted corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 2 common×8 bits. Alternatively, light may be emitted corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 4 common×4 (N=4) bits, and the number of light emitting areas and the number of light emitting portions that can emit light in each light emitting area (natural number N). Can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modified examples thereof, as shown in FIG. However, the output indicator or the base indicator 300 is not limited to the four continuous 7-segment display, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the proportion indicator or the base indicator may be one in which each lighting section is arranged instead of each gaming light emitting section LA1 to LA32 shown in FIG. 134, and each gaming light emitting section LA1 to LA32 shown in FIG. Instead of, each lighting unit may be arranged. However, when the output indicator or the base display is not the 7-segment type as shown in FIG. 5, the output ratio or the base cannot be shown as a numerical value. In this case, for example, the number of lit parts that are lit in the first lit region indicates the decile of the output rate or the base, and if eight lit parts are blinking, the decile of the output ratio or the base is ten. It will be "9". In addition, the number of lighting parts that are lit in the second lighting region indicates the power or the base digit, and if the eight output lighting parts are blinking, the digit of the power output is “9”. I'll decide. In this way, only the person who confirms the proportion or the base may use the manual or the like to understand the display (proportion, base) on the proportion display or the base display.

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modified examples thereof, the output ratio indicator 300 or the base indicator is lit corresponding to a total of 32 bits of 4 common×8 (N=8) bits. However, for example, only the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 may be provided and lighting may be performed corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 2 common×8 bits. Alternatively, the number of lighting regions and the number of lighting units that can be turned on in each lighting region (natural number N) may be such that lighting is performed corresponding to a total of 16 bits of 4 common×4 (N=4) bits. Can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modifications thereof, the number of light emitting parts (8) provided in one light emitting area of the game display 40 and one light emitting area of the proportion display 300 or the base display 300 are provided. The number of lighting units (8) is the same. However, the number of light emitting units provided in one light emitting region may be different from the number of light emitting units provided in one lighting region. Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modified examples thereof, the number of light emitting areas (4) included in the game display 40 is the same as the number of lighting areas (4) included in the proportion display 300 or the base display 300. .. However, the number of light emitting areas and the number of lighting areas may be different.

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modifications thereof, the output ratio (characteristic ratio or continuous character ratio) is displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 of the ratio indicator 300, and the first indicator of the base indicator 300 is displayed. The base (normal base, time saving base, or jackpot base) is displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320. However, the lighting area for displaying the proportion or the base can be appropriately changed. For example, the proportion or the base may be displayed for the third lighting area 330 and the fourth lighting area 340. In addition, the percentage rate, the normal base, or the shortened time base is displayed as a percent display with the tens place and the ones place. However, even if it is 60%, for example, the decimal point may be displayed together as in “0.60”. Alternatively, only the tens digit may be displayed by setting the percentage, the normal base or the time saving base as a percentage display. In this way, it is possible to display only one lighting area. In this case, it is preferable to round off the ones digit. Further, the accessory ratio may be displayed in the first lighting area 310 and the second lighting area 320, and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed in the third lighting area 330 and the fourth lighting area 340, and vice versa. You may do it. Also, the jackpot base may be displayed together with the decimal point, or only the hundreds may be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-mentioned modes and the modified examples thereof, while the big hit game can be executed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not execute the small hit game, so that FIG. 11(A), FIG. 65(A), and FIG. 109(A) The total number of prize balls and the number of winning prizes for operating accessory prize balls were measured using the prize ball counter addition table shown in FIG. However, in the case of a pachinko gaming machine capable of executing a small hit game, the total number of prize balls and the number of prize winning work prize balls may be measured using the prize ball number counter addition table shown in FIG. That is, when the game ball hits the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 by executing the small hit game, the value of the 100-ball counter and the value of the accessory prize ball number counter are set to "15". However, it suffices not to increase the value of the continuous prize prize ball number counter.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the 100-ball counter and the actual total prize ball number counter are used to measure the total prize ball number, which is the denominator for calculating the percentage, as one in 100-ball units. However, the total number of prize balls may be measured as one in units other than one hundred, and for example, a counter for 50 balls or a counter for 200 balls may be used. Further, the total number of prize balls may be measured in units of one ball by using only one counter called the total prize ball number counter. In this case, when calculating the character ratio, the value of the character prize counter may be divided by the value of the total prize counter, which is measured in units of 1 ball, and multiplied by 100. When calculating the character ratio, the value of the total prize ball counter, which is measured in units of one ball, may be divided by 100 to the value of the continuous character prize ball counter.

In addition, in the modified examples of each of the above-described embodiments, a normal 100-ball counter and a normal-fired ball counter are used in order to measure the number of shot balls, which is the denominator for calculating the normal base, as one in hundreds of balls. I was there. Further, in order to measure the number of shot balls, which is a denominator for calculating the time saving base, as one in hundreds of balls, a time saving 100 ball counter and a time saving shot number counter were used. In addition, a jackpot 100-ball counter and a jackpot launch ball number counter were used to measure the number of shot balls, which is the denominator for calculating the jackpot base, as one in hundreds. However, the number of each of these firing balls may be measured as one in units other than one hundred, and for example, a counter for 50 balls or a counter for 200 balls may be used. Further, the number of shot balls in the normal game state, the number of shot balls in the time saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state may be measured in units of one ball using one counter each. In this case, for example, when the normal base is calculated, the value of the counter, which is measured in units of one ball, may be divided by 100 to multiply the value of the normal total prize ball number counter by 100.

In addition, in the modified examples of the above-described embodiments, the bases (normal base, time saving base, and jackpot base) are calculated and displayed for each of the gaming states of the normal gaming state, the time-shortening state, and the jackpot gaming state. However, the range that divides the base can be changed as appropriate, and for example, the base other than the jackpot gaming state and the base in the jackpot gaming state may be calculated and displayed. Alternatively, the base may be calculated and displayed in consideration of all the states from the moment the power is turned on to the present time, without being divided by the game state. Alternatively, a base limited to only a specific state (for example, a time saving state) may be calculated and displayed.

Moreover, in each of the above-described embodiments and the modifications thereof, the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls are measured from the time when the power is first turned on (a predetermined start time). However, the above-mentioned predetermined start time can be changed as appropriate, for example, even at a certain specific date and time (January 1, 2017), or even when a hall employee starts a specific setting. good.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 to indicate that the percentage is a reference value. It was On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 to indicate that the proportion is an effective value. However, if the total number of prize balls is less than 10,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, the percentage is not displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 (that is, the percentage as a reference value is not shown. ), if the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more, the percentage may be displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320. In this case, it is possible to let the person who confirms the participation rate judge that the participation rate is a value that has converged to some extent (an effective value), provided that the participation rate is displayed. is there.

Further, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, if one of the first condition that the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more and the second condition that the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more is satisfied, the outflow rate is an effective value. I showed that. However, if both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, it may be possible to indicate that the exit rate is an effective value. Alternatively, only one of the first condition and the second condition may be provided to indicate whether or not the output rate is an effective value. When only the first condition is provided, the output rate is displayed if the first condition is satisfied, but the output rate may not be displayed if the first condition is not satisfied. When only the second condition is provided, the output rate is displayed if the second condition is satisfied, but the output rate may not be displayed unless the second condition is satisfied. Moreover, if the third condition that the time after the power is first turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is measured and the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 hours) is satisfied, the output rate is an effective value. May be indicated. Further, it may be possible to show that the output rate is an effective value by a condition that is appropriately combined from the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition.

Further, in the first embodiment, in order to determine that the proportion is an effective value that has converged to some extent, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more (predetermined value), or the number of fluctuations is 3000 times ( It was determined whether or not it was equal to or higher than a predetermined rotation number). However, the value of the total number of prize balls and the value of the predetermined number of revolutions can be appropriately changed. For example, it is determined whether or not the total number of prize balls is 30,000 or more (the number of predetermined prize balls), or the number of fluctuations is It may be determined whether or not it is 10,000 times or more (predetermined number of rotations).

Further, in the first embodiment, “1” (specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 in order to notify that the coverage is an effective value. However, the specific number for notifying that it is an effective value is not limited to “1”, and may be “7” and can be changed as appropriate. Further, it is not always necessary to display a number in order to inform that the percentage is an effective value. For example, by displaying "-" in the fourth lighting region 340, it may be notified that the output rate is an effective value. Further, the fact that the output rate is an effective value may be notified in a lighting area other than the fourth lighting area 340, and can be appropriately changed.

Moreover, in the said 1st form, it was made to alert|report on the output ratio by displaying the output ratio on the output display 300. However, the output rate may be notified by outputting a voice indicating the output rate from the speaker (sound output means) 67. In this case, the main control board 80 transmits a command including the calculated output rate information to the sub control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the voice control board 106 based on the command including the output rate information. It will be controlled (voice control). Based on the establishment of the above-mentioned display condition, the output ratio may be displayed on the output ratio indicator 300, and a voice indicating the output ratio may be output from the speaker 67, or a voice indicating the output ratio may be output from the speaker 67. You may make it output only.

Moreover, in the said 1st form, it was informed that the output rate was an effective value by the display on the output display 300. However, the notification that the proportion is an effective value can be changed as appropriate. For example, a specific display is performed on the image display device 7 or the sub liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as the panel lamp 5 or the frame lamp 66 is caused to emit light in a specific light emission mode, or a specific notification sound is output from the speaker 67. Therefore, it may be notified that the output rate is an effective value.

Further, in the first embodiment, the display of the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the output rate on the output display 300 are alternatively performed. However, for example, the drive circuit 200X may be configured as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35 to display the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the output ratio on the output display 300 at the same time. You may do it.

In the first embodiment, when in the game control state, that is, the control process (specific control process) related to the variable display of the special symbol or the control process (specific control process) during the control of the jackpot game state is executed. When it is, the ratio is not calculated (the ratio calculation process (S117, see FIG. 45) is not executed). However, when the output rate is not calculated, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the control processing (specific control processing) during the control in the time saving state is being executed, the output rate may not be calculated. .. Further, for example, the proportion may not be calculated until the total number of prize balls reaches a specific number.

Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the total award ball number can be measured with one hundred-ball unit as one using the counter for 100 balls and the actual total award ball number counter. However, in order to measure the total number of prize balls with one hundred-ball unit as one unit, it is not necessary to use two counters (a counter for 100 balls, an actual total prize ball number counter), and it can be appropriately changed. For example, by using only the total prize ball number counter that measures the total prize ball number in units of one ball, the value of the total prize ball number counter is divided by 100 to measure the value with one hundred ball unit as one. You can “Measurement” means to grasp a quantity for a certain purpose.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, if the total number of fired balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, “0” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 and the base is a reference value. showed that. On the other hand, if the total number of fired balls is 100,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more, “1” is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 to indicate that the base is an effective value. However, if the total number of fired balls is less than 100,000 and the number of fluctuations is less than 3000, the base is not displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320 (that is, the base as a reference value is not shown), If the total number of fired balls is 100,000 or more or the number of changes is 3,000 or more, the base may be displayed in the first lighting region 310 and the second lighting region 320. In this case, it is possible for a person who confirms the base to determine that the base is a value that has converged to some extent (base as an effective value), provided that the base is displayed.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, if either one of the first condition that the total number of shot balls is 100,000 or more and the second condition that the number of fluctuations is 3,000 or more is satisfied, the base has an effective value. It was shown that. However, if both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied, it may be possible to indicate that the base is an effective value. Alternatively, only one of the first condition and the second condition may be provided to indicate whether or not the base is an effective value. When only the first condition is provided, the base is displayed if the first condition is satisfied, but the base may not be displayed if the first condition is not satisfied. When only the second condition is provided, the base is displayed if the second condition is satisfied, but the base may not be displayed if the second condition is not satisfied. If the third condition that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time is measured and the measured time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 10 hours), it means that the base is an effective value. You may make it show. Further, it may be possible to indicate that the base is an effective value by a condition that is appropriately combined from the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition.

In the modified example of the first embodiment, in order to determine that the base is an effective value that has converged to some extent, it is determined whether the total number of fired balls is 100,000 (predetermined value) or more, or the number of fluctuations is 3000. It was determined whether or not the number of rotations (predetermined number of rotations) or more. However, the value of the total number of fired balls and the value of the predetermined number of revolutions can be changed as appropriate. For example, it is determined whether the total number of fired balls is 300,000 or more (predetermined value), or the number of fluctuations is 10,000 times. It may be determined whether or not (predetermined number of rotations) or more. In addition, in order to determine that the base is an effective value that has converged to some extent, the total of the number of shot balls in the normal state, the number of shot balls in the time saving state, and the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state (total number of shot balls, It was determined whether or not the specific measurement value including the denominator measurement value) is a predetermined value or more. However, when displaying the normal base, it is determined whether or not the number of shot balls (denominator measurement value) in the normal game state is a predetermined value or more, and it is determined whether or not the value is a valid value. When displaying, it is judged whether the number of shot balls in the time-saving state (denominator measurement value) is more than a predetermined value to determine whether it is an effective value. When displaying the jackpot base, it is a jackpot. It may be possible to determine whether or not the number of shot balls (denominator measurement value) in the gaming state is equal to or greater than a predetermined value and to determine whether or not it is an effective value.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, “1” (specific number) is displayed in the fourth lighting region 340 in order to inform that the base is an effective value. However, the specific number for notifying that it is an effective value is not limited to “1”, and may be “7” and can be changed as appropriate. It is not always necessary to display a number to notify that the base is an effective value. For example, by displaying "-" in the fourth lighting region 340, it may be notified that the base is an effective value. Further, the fact that the base is an effective value may be notified in a lighting area other than the fourth lighting area 340, and can be changed appropriately.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, the base is displayed on the base display unit 300 to notify the base. However, the base may be notified by outputting a voice indicating the base from the speaker (sound output means) 67. In this case, the main control board 80 transmits a command including the calculated base information to the sub control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 controls the voice control board 106 based on the command including the base information ( Voice control). Based on the establishment of the above display condition, the base display 300 may display the base and the speaker 67 may output the sound indicating the base, or the speaker 67 may output only the sound indicating the base. You may do it.

In addition, in the modification of the first embodiment, the base display 300 indicates that the base is an effective value. However, the notification that the base is a valid value can be changed as appropriate. For example, a specific display is performed on the image display device 7 or the sub liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as the panel lamp 5 or the frame lamp 66 is caused to emit light in a specific light emission mode, or a specific notification sound is output from the speaker 67. By doing so, it may be notified that the base is an effective value.

Further, in the modification of the first embodiment, the display of the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the base on the base display 300 are alternatively performed. However, for example, the drive circuit 200X is configured as in the first comparative example shown in FIG. 35 so that the display of the game information on the game display 40 and the display of the base on the base display 300 can be simultaneously executed. May be.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, when in the game control state, that is, the control process related to the variable display of the special symbol (specific control process) or the control process during the control of the jackpot game state (specific control process) The base calculation is not performed during the execution of step (base calculation processing (S152, see FIG. 66) is not executed). However, when the base is not calculated, it can be changed as appropriate. For example, the base may not be calculated when the control process (specific control process) during the control in the time saving state is being executed. Further, for example, the base may not be calculated until the total number of fired balls reaches a specific number.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, by using a normal 100-ball counter and a normal-fired ball number counter, the number of fired balls in the normal game state can be measured as one hundred-ball unit. However, in order to measure the number of shot balls in the normal gaming state with one hundred-ball unit as one, it is not necessary to use two counters (a counter for 100 normal balls, a counter for normal shot balls), and it can be changed as appropriate. Is. For example, by using only the normal firing ball number counter that measures the number of firing balls in the normal gaming state in units of one ball, the value of the normal firing ball number counter is divided by 100, and the value in which one hundred ball unit is set. May be measured. It should be noted that the number of shot balls in the time saving state or the number of shot balls in the jackpot gaming state may be measured by dividing by 100 using only a counter that measures each ball.

Further, in the above-mentioned first form, the proportion is displayed, and in the modification of the above-mentioned first form, the base is displayed. However, the configuration of the first embodiment and the configuration of the modified example thereof may be combined so that both the base and the output rate can be displayed. In this case, both the base and the output rate may be simultaneously displayed on one display (display means), or the output rate and the base may be selectively displayed. Alternatively, the base and the output rate may be separately displayed on two separate displays.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and the modifications thereof, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is used as the main control board 80 (see FIG. 6) and the rear side cases 401A to 401D of the main board cases 400A to 400D (FIGS. 80 to 83). ) And the payout control board 110 (FIG. 113). However, the location of the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is not limited to the above-mentioned location, and can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not hinder the visibility of the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80. For example, as shown in FIG. 141, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be arranged on a transparent central cover 55 located at the rearmost position. In this case, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 arranged on the center cover 55 may be connected to the connector CN5 of the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC5. The central cover 55 is attached to the gaming machine frame 50 and protects various control boards and the back unit of the gaming board 2 from the rear.

Moreover, in the said 3rd form and each modification, as shown in FIGS. 80-83, by moving (rotating or sliding) the back side cases 401A-401D, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is shown. I moved it. However, you may change as follows.

That is, as shown in FIG. 142, a rectangular notch 401a is formed on the left side of the rear case 401E of the main board case 400E. Cylindrical shaft members 401b and 401c extending in the vertical direction are provided on the left and right sides of the notch 401a. The cylindrical portions 300a and 300b provided at the left and right ends of the ratio indicator 300 are vertically slidably inserted into the shaft members 401b and 401c. The proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is connected to the main control board 80 via the flexible cable FC6, and the cutout 401a, the shaft members 401b and 401c, and the cylindrical portions 300a and 300b are moved by the moving mechanism portion. Equivalent to. In this way, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is normally arranged below the notch 401a as shown in FIG. 142(A). However, at this time, the visibility of the integrated circuit IC 10 (see FIG. 142(B)) located in front of the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is poor. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 142(B), if the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is slid upward with respect to the rear case 401E, the visibility of the integrated circuit IC10 can be secured. .. With this configuration, it is possible to move the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 without moving the rear case 401E. In addition to the modification shown in FIG. 142, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be slid or rotated in the left-right direction without moving the rear case.

Moreover, in the said 2nd modification and 3rd modification of the said 3rd form, the output indicator 300 was moved to the left-right direction or the up-down direction. However, if the integrated circuit mounted on the mounting surface 80a can be easily seen, the output indicator 300 or the base display 300 may be movable in the front-rear direction. Then, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be movable in any two or more of the left-right direction, the up-down direction, and the front-back direction.

In addition, in the second modified example and the third modified example of the third embodiment, the output indicator 300 is slid parallel to the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80. That is, the ratio display 300 was slid in a direction orthogonal to the orthogonal axis of the mounting surface 80a. However, if the ratio indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is in a direction intersecting the orthogonal axis of the mounting surface 80a, it may be slid so as not to be parallel to the mounting surface 80a.

Further, in the third embodiment and each of the modified examples thereof, the ratio indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is in a non-opposing position where it does not oppose the mounting surface 80a of the main control board 80 (FIG. 80(C), FIG. 81(C), It is made possible to move up to FIG. 82(B) and FIG. 83(B). However, as shown in FIG. 142, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be movable only in the range facing the mounting surface 80a. Further, the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be slightly moved within a range not facing the mounting surface 80a.

In addition, in the third embodiment and the respective modified examples thereof, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is configured to be movable with respect to the main control board (predetermined member) 80. However, with respect to which member the ratio indicator or the base indicator 300 can be moved can be appropriately changed. For example, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is arranged in the payout substrate case 500 (see FIG. 7), and the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is moved with respect to the payout control board (predetermined member) 110. It may be configured so that it can.

Moreover, in the said 3rd form and each modification, it was comprised so that the output indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 could rotate or slide. However, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved by a method other than rotation or slide. For example, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is attached to an urging mechanism (moving mechanism portion) including a spring member, and the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 is pressed against the urging force of the spring member. By doing so, the proportion indicator 300 or the base indicator 300 may be moved.

Further, in the third embodiment and the first modified example thereof, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 81, the output indicator 300 is moved (rotated) to a region not facing the mounting surface 80a. However, in the range in which the proportion display device 300 faces the mounting surface 80a, the proportion display device 300 may be moved (rotated or slid) so that the area facing the mounting surface 80a becomes small. In this case, for example, the proportion indicator 300 is moved from a position facing a portion of the mounting surface 80a where a large number of integrated circuits are mounted to a position facing a portion of the mounting surface 80a where a small number of integrated circuits are mounted. It may be moved. The base display 300 may be moved as described above.

Further, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 43, the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is turned on and the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is cut off are collated, and each checksum is checked. If so, the stored content of the special memory 89 is held, and if the checksums do not match, the stored content of the special memory 89 is erased. However, if the checksum of the gaming RAM 84 calculated when the power is turned on matches the checksum of the gaming RAM 84 calculated when the power is cut off, it is estimated that the stored contents of the special memory 89 are correct, and the special memory 89 Holds the stored contents of. On the other hand, if the checksums do not match, the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be estimated to be incorrect, and the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be erased. By doing so, it is possible to omit the processing of calculating and collating the checksum of the special memory 89. That is, it is possible to easily check whether or not the stored contents of the special memory 89 are correct by utilizing the calculation and verification of the checksum of the gaming RAM 84 which has been performed conventionally. As a specific process, the power-on process (S001) shown in FIG. 143 may be executed instead of the power-on process (S001) shown in FIG.

Further, in the first embodiment, if the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is turned on does not match the checksum of the special memory 89 calculated when the power is cut off, the stored contents of the special memory 89 are deleted. I chose However, the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be erased by a special operation on the operation means (for example, pressing the RAM clear switch 152 for 10 seconds when the power is turned on). That is, an operation means for erasing the stored contents of the special memory 89 may be provided.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11B and 11C, the game RAM 84 and the special memory 89 are provided as separate storage means. However, as shown in FIG. 144, one gaming RAM 84a having both a storage area (game area) of the game RAM 84 and a storage area (special area) of the special memory 89 may be provided. In this case, when the RAM clear switch 152 is operated when the power is turned on, the stored content of the game area is erased, while the stored content of the special area is not erased. Then, the checksum of the game area and the checksum of the special area are calculated separately, and the storage content of the special area is retained or erased based on the checksum of the checksum of the special area. Is also good. Alternatively, the entire checksum including the game area and the special area may be calculated, and the stored contents of the special area may be retained or erased based on the checksum comparison.

Further, in the first embodiment, the checksum is used as the error detection code calculated to determine whether the stored contents of the game RAM 84 or the special memory 89 are normal. However, the error detection code is not limited to the checksum and can be changed as appropriate. For example, by obtaining a parity bit (error detection code) of "0" or "1" in order to maintain the overall odd-even property for binary data, and by collating the data to which the parity bit is added, Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the stored contents are normal.

In addition, in the first embodiment described above, the proportion calculation is simplified by dividing the total number of prize balls by the value obtained by measuring the number of prize balls as one hundred ball unit. However, the method of simplifying the calculation of the yield rate is not limited to the above method, and the following method may be used, for example.

That is, the number of accessory action prize balls (number of prize prize balls or continuous prize prize balls) that can be measured as, for example, 32-bit (first bit range) information, and a total prize ball count. A total prize number counter capable of measuring the number as 32-bit information is prepared. Then, when calculating the percentage, first, of the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball number counter, the significant digit "1" is searched for from the upper digit. Next, for example, 16-bit (second bit range) information is extracted from the digit (significant digit) in which the significant digit is found. In this way, 16-bit information of the total number of prize balls is created. Then, the information corresponding to the 16-bit digit of the created total prize balls is extracted from the 32-bit information measured by the accessory working prize ball number counter. For example, if the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit information is extracted from the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball number counter, the 32-bit information measured by the accessory action prize ball number counter From the information, the information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted. In this way, 16-bit information of the number of winning prize balls is created. Then, the proportion is calculated by dividing the 16-bit information on the number of winning prize winning balls by the 16-bit information on the total number of prize balls. According to this method, it is possible to simplify the calculation of the output rate (reduce the processing load) by dividing by the information of 16 bits instead of dividing by the information of 32 bits. And if the method of simply extracting 16-bit information from the most significant digit, the error from the correct rate value becomes large when the number of total prize balls is relatively small, such as 1,000. With this method, since 16-bit information is extracted from the significant digit, a relatively large total number of award balls such as 100,000 or a relatively small total number of award balls such as 1,000. Also, it is possible to reduce the error from the correct rate value.

Further, in the modified example of the first embodiment, for example, by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of shot balls in the normal game state divided by one hundred ball unit, Simplified base calculation. However, the method of simplifying the calculation of the base is not limited to the above method, and the following method may be used, for example.

That is, a total prize ball number counter capable of measuring the total prize ball number as, for example, 32-bit (first bit range) information and a total shoot ball number counter capable of measuring the total number of fired balls as, for example, 32-bit information. prepare. Then, when the base is calculated, first of all, in the 32-bit information measured by the total number of fired balls counter, the digit that becomes the significant digit "1" is searched from the upper digit. Next, for example, 16-bit (second bit range) information is extracted from the digit (significant digit) in which the significant digit is found. In this way, 16-bit information of the total number of fired balls is created. Subsequently, from the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball number counter, the information corresponding to the 16-bit digit of the created total ball number is extracted. For example, if the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit of the 32-bit information measured by the total shot ball counter is extracted, the 32-bit information measured by the total prize ball counter Of these, the information from the upper 14th digit to the upper 30th digit is extracted. In this way, 16-bit information of the total number of prize balls is created. Then, the base is calculated by dividing the 16-bit information of the total number of prize balls by the 16-bit information of the total number of shot balls. According to this method, it is possible to simplify the base calculation (reduce the processing load) by dividing by the information of 16 bits instead of dividing by the information of 32 bits. And if the 16-bit information is simply extracted from the most significant digit, the error from the correct base value becomes large when the total number of balls to be fired is relatively small, such as 1000 shots. Since this method is a method of extracting 16-bit information from the significant digit, even if the total number of balls fired is relatively large, such as 100,000 or the total number of balls fired, such as 1,000 , It is possible to reduce the error from the correct base value.

Further, in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75, the rate display measurement value (total prize ball number, accessory working prize ball number) stored in the game RAM 84A and the special memory 89A are stored. If the measured values for display of output rate are compared (S027) and the values of the measured value for display of output do not match (NO in S027), the measurement for display of output rate stored in the special memory 89A. The value was transferred to the game RAM 84A (S026). However, if the values of the proportion display measurement values do not match, the proportion display measurement values stored in the game RAM 84A are reset, and the proportion display measurement values stored in the special memory 89A are reset. The value may be reset. Alternatively, without performing the above-mentioned collation, when the power is turned on, the measured value for displaying the proportion stored in the special memory 89A may be transferred to the game RAM 84A. In the modified example of the second embodiment, it is of course possible to replace the above-mentioned measured value for displaying ratio with the measured value for base display.

Further, in the fourth embodiment and its modified example, an external display device (external power ratio display device 900 or external base display device 900) is attached to the connector (connecting portion) CN3 provided on the main control board 80, and the external display device is attached. The percentage or base can be displayed. However, the connecting portion for attaching the external display device may be provided in a portion other than the main control board 80, and may be provided in, for example, the payout control board 110, the game board 2, and the gaming machine frame 50. Further, the structure of the connecting portion is not limited to the connector, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the proportion or base is displayed on the external display device attached to the connector CN3 of the main control board 80. However, the external display device does not display the output ratio or the base, and the output ratio (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio) or the base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is within the normal range depending on the mode of the light emitting means. You may make it notify only whether it exists.

Moreover, in the said 6th form and 7th form, and those modifications, if the output or base is in a normal range, the special LED350 will be in a lighting mode (1st mode), and the output or base is outside a normal range. Then, the special LED 350 is set to the blinking mode (second mode). However, the mode of the special LED 350 can be appropriately changed, and if the output rate or the base is within the normal range, the special LED 350 is set to the blinking mode or the extinguished mode, or if the output rate or the base is outside the normal range, the special LED 350 is turned on. A mode or an extinguishing mode may be adopted. Further, when it is determined that the output rate or the base is out of the normal range, the main control board 80 may stop the game control (main control main processing). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game any more. If it is determined that the output rate or the base is out of the normal range, an abnormal signal is sent from the external terminal board provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an external device (for example, a data counter) other than the pachinko gaming machine 1. You may make it output. Thus, the external device that has input the abnormality signal can notify the abnormality in the output rate or the base.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment, while the precondition that the total number of prize balls is 10,000 shots (predetermined prize ball number) or more or the number of fluctuations is 3000 times (predetermined number of revolutions) or more, the output rate exceeds the predetermined value. Then, the special LED 350 is in a blinking mode. However, the above-described preconditions can be changed as appropriate, and for example, a precondition that the total number of prize balls is 30,000 or more or the number of fluctuations is 10,000 or more may be used. That is, the value of the predetermined number of prize balls and the value of the predetermined number of rotations can be appropriately changed. It should be noted that the value of the predetermined number of prize balls and the value of the predetermined number of revolutions are not set at the time of manufacturing the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be arbitrarily set by, for example, an operation of an employee or the like in a hall (game hall). good. Further, only the precondition that the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more, or the precondition that the number of fluctuations is 3000 or more may be set. It is also possible to assume that the total number of prize balls is 10,000 or more (predetermined number of prize balls) and the number of fluctuations is 3000 (predetermined number of revolutions) or more. Moreover, it is also possible not to provide any precondition.

Further, in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, and their modified examples, a special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means) 350 indicating whether the output rate or the base is abnormal is arranged on the main control board 80. .. However, the location of the special LED 350 is not limited to that on the main control board 80, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the special LED 350 may be arranged on the payout control board 110. In this case, the result of the output rate (characteristic ratio, continuous character ratio) or base (normal base, time saving base, jackpot base) is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the payout control board 110 as a command. As a result, the CPU of the payout control board 110 determines whether or not the output rate is within the normal range or whether or not the base is within the normal range based on the reception of the command. Then, the payout control microcomputer 116 may change the light emission mode of the special LED 350 based on the result of the abnormality determination. In this way, since the game control microcomputer 81 does not perform the abnormality determination of the proportion or the abnormality determination of the base, it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81.

Alternatively, the special LED 350 may be arranged on the production control board such as the sub control board 90. In this case, for example, the output rate or the base result is transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90 as a command. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the abnormality determination of the proportion or the abnormality determination of the base based on the command. Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 may change the light emission mode of the special LED 350 based on the result of the abnormality determination. By doing so, the game control microcomputer 81 does not perform the abnormality determination of the ratio or the abnormality determination of the base, so that the load of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81 can be reduced.

In addition, in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, and the modified examples thereof, a special LED (abnormality notification means, notification means) 350 that indicates whether the output rate or the base is abnormal is newly provided. A means (frame lamp 66 or board lamp 5) may be used to indicate whether the ratio or the base is abnormal. Further, the abnormality notifying means for indicating whether the output ratio or the base is abnormal is not limited to the light emitting means, and may be the image display device 7 (display means) or the speaker 67 (sound output means). When the abnormality notification means is the image display device 7, it is sufficient to display a special image on the image display device 7 to indicate that the proportion or the base is abnormal. When the abnormality notification means is the speaker 67, it is sufficient to show that the output rate or the base is abnormal by outputting a special sound from the speaker 67.

Moreover, in the said 6th form, the regulation value (70%, 60%) for judging that the output rate has become abnormal can be changed suitably. Further, in the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the range in which the base is determined to be within the normal range (30% to 39% for the normal base, 84% to 99% for the time saving base, 600% for the jackpot base) ~800%) can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the seventh embodiment, each value of the simple abnormality determination table (see FIG. 100) for determining that the output rate is substantially abnormal can be changed as appropriate. Further, in the modified example of the seventh embodiment, each value of each simple abnormality determination table (see FIGS. 105(A)(B)(C)) for determining that the base is substantially abnormal, It can be changed as appropriate.

In the modified example of the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the value of the number of shot balls (judgment number of shots) when determining whether the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit value, and The value of the number of shot balls (judgment number of judged shots) when judging whether the number of prize balls is smaller than the normal lower limit value was the same. However, the value of the number of shot balls when determining whether the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit value, and the number of launch balls when determining whether the total number of prize balls is less than the normal lower limit value. The values may be different from each other. In the modified example of the seventh embodiment, both the large and small judgment as to whether the total number of prize balls exceeds the normal upper limit value and the large and small judgment as to whether the total prize ball number is smaller than the normal lower limit value are performed. However, only one of them may be used.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of prize balls and the number of prize winning prize balls on the basis of the prize ball command (ball entry information) transmitted from the main control board 80. However, the payout control board 110 may measure the total number of prize balls and the number of winning accessory working prize balls based on a command (signal) transmitted from the main control board 80 separately from the prize ball command. In this case, the above-mentioned command includes information that can be used to determine which winning opening has been won. In addition, the winning ball information may be transmitted from the main control board 80 due to the fact that the gaming ball has won the winning opening, and is not limited to the winning timing of the gaming ball but is transmitted at any timing after the winning timing. You may do it.

In the modification of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board 110 measures the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls based on the prize ball command (ball entry information) transmitted from the main control board 80. However, the payout control board 110 may measure the total number of fired balls and the total number of prize balls based on a command (signal) transmitted from the main control board 80 separately from the prize ball command. In this case, the above-mentioned command includes information that can be used to determine which entrance has entered. Further, the ball entry information may be transmitted from the main control board 80 due to the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry port, and is not limited to the ball entry timing of the game ball, but any of the entry timing and thereafter. It may be transmitted at a timing.

In the eighth embodiment, the payout control board (specific control board) 110 is caused to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of prize winning prize balls. However, the control boards other than the payout control board 110 may be made to measure the total number of prize balls and the number of accessory working prize balls. For example, the main control board 80 transmits to the sub-control board 90 a command capable of discriminating the winning prize hole, and the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the total number of prize balls and the number of prize winning prize balls based on the command. Along with the measurement, the output rate is calculated. Then, the sub-control board 90 transmits a command indicating the calculation result of the proportion to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the proportion on the image display device (display means) 7. good. In this way, it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81. Further, since it is not necessary to provide a new display device called the output ratio display device 300, it is possible to easily display the output ratio.

In short, the process for measuring the total number of prize balls and the number of prize winning action prize balls (the prize ball number counter addition process (S114)) and the process for calculating the proportion (proportion calculation processing (S117)) And the processing for displaying the proportion (proportion display processing (S2304)) may be executed by different control boards, and the combination thereof can be appropriately changed.

In the modified example of the eighth embodiment, the payout control board (specific control board) 110 is caused to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls. However, a control board other than the payout control board 110 may be made to measure the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls. For example, the main control board 80 transmits a command capable of discriminating the entered ball entrance to the sub control board 90, and the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls based on the command. Performs measurement and base calculation. Then, the sub-control board 90 may transmit a command indicating the calculation result of the base to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may display the base on the image display device (display means) 7. In this way, it is possible to reduce the load of the control processing of the game control microcomputer 81. Furthermore, since it is not necessary to provide a new display device called the base display device 300, it is possible to easily display the base.

In short, in order to display the base, the process for counting the total number of shot balls and the total number of prize balls (counter addition process (S151)), the process for calculating the base (base calculation process (S152)) The processing (base display processing (S2340)) may be executed by different control boards, and the combination thereof can be changed appropriately.

In addition, in the twelfth embodiment and its modification, as shown in FIG. 130, the switch circuit portion 260 is configured by combining both N-type and P-type MOSFETs. However, if the game display state and the proportion display state can be switched, or the game display state and the base display state can be switched, the configuration of the switch circuit unit can be appropriately changed. For example, the switch circuit unit may be configured with either an N-type MOSFET or a P-type MOSFET. The switch circuit unit may be configured by using other types of transistors such as JFET instead of using the MOSFET.

Although the output levels (“L” level or “H” level) of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 have been described as appropriate in each of the above-described modes and their modifications, the select signal XCSE0 described above can be changed by changing the drive circuit. , XCSE1 and XCSE10 may be differently implemented. The output levels of the select signals XCSE0, XCSE1, and XCSE10 are set in the output process (S107) (proportion display process (S2304), game display process (S2303), base display process (S2340)). It may be configured such that it is executed as a function provided in advance by the microcomputer 81 for use and not executed as the output process (S107).

Further, in each of the above-described modes and its modified examples, the game control microcomputer 81 of the main control board 80 stores programs (proportion calculation processing (S117), proportion display processing (S2304), base display processing (proportion calculation processing (S117)). S2340) etc.), the calculation of the output rate, the display of the output rate, the calculation of the base, and the display of the base were executed. However, a ROM different from the ROM 83 that stores the program (main control main processing) related to the progress of the game is provided, and the calculation of the ratio, the display of the ratio, the calculation of the base, and the display of the base are executed in the different ROM. You may make it memorize|store the program for doing. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 may perform the calculation of the output rate, the display of the output rate, the calculation of the base, and the display of the base based on the program stored in the ROM different from the ROM 83.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, both the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be displayed on the ratio indicator 300 as the ratio. However, only one of the character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be displayed on the proportion display device 300.

In addition, in the modified examples of each of the above-described modes, the number of balls to be paid to each winning opening (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first big winning opening 30, second big winning opening 35, normal winning opening 27) In addition to counting, the total number of shot balls was counted by counting the number of balls entering the outlet 16. However, the total number of shot balls may be counted as follows.

As shown in FIG. 145, the out-port discharge route HK extends from the out-port 16 to the outside of the game region 3, and the first start-port discharge route H1 extends from the first start-port 20 to the outside of the game region 3, The second starting opening discharging path H2 extends from the 2 starting opening 21 to the outside of the game area 3, and the first large winning opening discharging path H3 extends from the first big winning opening 30 to the outside of the playing area 3 to make the second large The second special winning opening discharging path H4 extends from the winning opening 35 to the outside of the gaming area 3, and the normal winning opening discharging path H5 extends from the normal winning opening 27 to the outside of the gaming area 3. All of these discharge routes HK, H1, H2, H3, H4 and H5 communicate with the total discharge route HX. The total discharge route HX is provided with a discharge port sensor 16b capable of detecting the game balls flowing from the respective discharge routes HK, H1, H2, H3, H4 and H5. The detection signal from the outlet sensor 16b is input to the main control board 80. In this way, by counting the detections by the total discharge port sensor 16b, it becomes possible to count the number of all the game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 3. That is, it is possible to count the total number of shot balls.

In addition, in place of the total discharge port sensor 16b capable of detecting the game balls that have flowed in from all the discharge routes HK, H1, H2, H3, H4, and H5 described above, some discharge routes (for example, the discharge routes HK and H1). , H2) may be used to count the total number of shot balls by using a discharge port sensor capable of detecting the game balls that have flowed in. Further, without using the method of counting the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 3, a sensor is provided which can directly detect the game balls emitted toward the game area 3 (for example, near the rail member 4). It is also possible to count the total number of balls to be fired by providing a sensor).

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modified examples thereof, the proportion (a specific ratio value) that is the ratio of the total number of prize balls and the number of prize-winning prize balls is displayed, and the ratio between the total number of prize balls and the total number of shot balls. The base (specific ratio value) is displayed. However, the specific ratio value is not limited to the ratio or the base, and can be appropriately changed as long as it is a ratio between a certain first specific game ball number and a certain second specific game ball number. For example, as a specific ratio value, a ratio of the number of balls entering the first starting opening 20 (the first specific gaming ball number) and the number of balls entering the first big winning opening 30 (the second specific gaming ball number) Or, it is the ratio of the number of balls entering the first starting port 20 (the first specific game ball number) and the number of balls entering the second starting port 21 (the second specific game ball number), It may be a ratio of the number of balls to the winning port 27 (first specific game ball number) and the number of balls to all the winning ports (second specific game ball number). Further, for example, an out ratio value (specific ratio value), which is a ratio between the total number of prize balls and the number of out balls (specific game ball), may be displayed. Note that the number of out balls is the number of game balls that enter the out port 16 without winning any of the winning ports. In the out percentage value, if the value of the total number of prize balls is abnormally large with respect to the number of out balls, it is a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can give an unjust privilege to the player, and unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction occurs. It is possible to determine that it has occurred. On the other hand, if the value of the total prize balls is abnormally small with respect to the number of out balls, it means that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has too few benefits to be given to the player, and an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred. It is possible to judge that. In addition, instead of the out ratio value which is the ratio of the total number of prize balls and the number of out balls, the out ratio value which is the ratio of the number of prizes and the number of out balls to a certain specific winning opening is displayed. Is also good.

In addition, in the modified examples of the above-described embodiments, a base irrelevant to time is calculated and displayed. However, the base at a predetermined time may be calculated and displayed. For example, it is possible to calculate and display the base (short-time winning rate) for one hour. In this case, if the base for one hour exceeds 300%, it can be determined that unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred. Alternatively, for example, the base (medium-time payout rate) for 10 hours may be calculated and displayed. In this case, if the base for 10 hours is smaller than 50% or larger than 200%, it can be determined that an unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction has occurred.

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modified examples thereof, the output rate or the base is displayed, but as shown below, a value serving as an index for determining an abnormality of the gaming machine (specific index value) may be displayed. .. For example, the number of winnings (specific index value) per winning opening (first starting opening 20, second starting opening 21, first big winning opening 30, second big winning opening 35, ordinary winning opening 27) per predetermined time May be displayed. In this case, if the number of winnings to a particular winning opening is extremely large or small compared to the number of winnings to other winning openings, it may be determined that there is unauthorized modification, breakdown, or malfunction. It is possible. Alternatively, only the total number of prize balls (the number of payout balls) may be displayed. In this case, for example, a person who looks at the total number of prize balls per minute calculates a base for the total number of balls to be launched (about 60 shots per minute) to judge unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction. You may do it. Alternatively, only the number of out balls may be displayed. In this case, for example, if the number of out balls per minute (predetermined time) greatly exceeds 60, or if the number of out balls per minute is extremely small, unauthorized modification, failure, or malfunction occurs. It is possible to determine that

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modifications thereof, four random numbers such as a jackpot random number are acquired as the random numbers (ball entry information) acquired based on the winning of the first start opening 20 or the second start opening 21. However, one random number may be acquired, and whether or not it is a big hit, the type of big hit, the presence or absence of reach, and the type of variation pattern may be determined based on the random number. That is, it is possible to arbitrarily set the number of random numbers to be acquired based on the starting winning and what to determine in each random number.

Further, in each of the above-described modes and the modified examples thereof, it is configured as a so-called V confirmation machine (a gaming machine that controls to a high-probability state based on passage of the specific area 39), but to a high-probability state based on the type of the winning jackpot symbol. It may be configured as a game machine whose transition is determined. Further, in each of the above-described modes, the game machine is configured as a so-called ST machine (probably variable number of times gaming machine), but once controlled to the high probability state, the gaming machine continues to be controlled to the high probability state until the start of the next jackpot game ( It may be configured as a so-called probability variation loop type gaming machine).

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments and the modified examples thereof, the variation of the special figure 2 is configured to be executed with priority over the variation of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the variation of the special figure 2 and the variation of the special figure 1 may be executed in accordance with the winning order to the starting opening. In this case, a storage area capable of storing a sum of the first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation is provided in the game RAM 84, and the entry information is stored in the storage area according to the winning order, and the old storage order is stored. It may be configured to digest from. Further, it may be configured such that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be executed even while the special figure 2 is changing, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 can be executed even while the special figure 1 is changing. That is, it may be configured as a gaming machine that performs so-called simultaneous variation. Further, it may be configured as a so-called 1 type/2 type mixing machine or a honey monotype game machine. That is, the present invention can be suitably applied to game machines of various game characteristics regardless of the game characteristics of the game machine.

Note that it is of course possible to combine the features of the above-described embodiments and the features of the modified examples, or to partially remove the features.

12. Inventions Shown in the Above-mentioned Embodiments The following inventions of respective means are shown in the above-mentioned respective embodiments and their modifications. In the description of the means described below, corresponding configuration names and expressions in the above-described modes and modifications thereof, and reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the constituent elements of each invention are not limited to this appendix.

The invention according to means 1 is
A ball entrance (first start opening 20, second start opening 21) into which a game ball can enter,
Entry information acquisition means (game control microcomputer 81 executing steps S206 and S210) for obtaining entry information (various random numbers such as jackpot random numbers) based on the entry of the game sphere into the entrance.
Based on the ball entry information acquired by the ball entry information acquisition means, a hit determination means capable of executing a hit determination of whether it is a big hit (game control microcomputer 81 executing steps S1402, S1408),
Identification symbol control means (game control microcomputer 81 for executing steps S1406, S1412, S1306) capable of stopping and displaying the identification symbol (special symbol) showing the result of the hit determination through the variable display,
The jackpot game executing means (game control microcomputer 81 for executing step S1307) capable of executing a jackpot game advantageous to the player after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot stop mode indicating a jackpot win, and In the gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1),
A specific ratio that can calculate a specific ratio value (proportion, base) that is the ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player and the number of specific game balls (number of prize-operated prize balls, total number of shot balls) Value calculation means (game control microcomputer 81 that executes steps 117 and 152),
A specific display device (proportion display device 300, base display device 300) capable of displaying the specific ratio value calculated by the specific ratio value calculation means;
Fluctuation number measuring means (game control microcomputer 81 that executes step S1413) capable of measuring the number of fluctuations in which the variation display of the identification symbol is executed from a predetermined start time (when the power is first turned on) ,
When the number of changes measured by the number-of-changes measuring unit is equal to or more than a predetermined number of rotations (for example, 3000 times) set in advance, the specific ratio value displayed on the specific display unit is the predetermined number of changes. A game characterized by comprising an effective value informing means (game control microcomputer 81 executing step S2536, step S2666) capable of informing that it is an effective value calculated in a situation where the number of revolutions is equal to or higher than the number of revolutions. It is a machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the specific ratio value can be confirmed by displaying the specific ratio value on the specific indicator. Furthermore, if the number of fluctuations in which the variable display of the identification symbol is executed is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of rotations, it is possible to notify that the displayed specific ratio value is an effective value. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish whether or not the specific ratio value is a value that has converged to some extent, and it is possible to more correctly determine the specific ratio value.

The invention according to means 2 is
In the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effective value notification means,
When the number of fluctuations measured by the number of fluctuations measuring means is less than the predetermined number of revolutions, the specific ratio value displayed on the specific indicator is in a situation where the number of fluctuations is less than the predetermined number of revolutions. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of informing that it is a calculated reference value (performing step S2538, step S2668).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, if the number of fluctuations in which the fluctuation display of the identification symbol is executed is less than the predetermined rotation speed, it is possible to notify that the displayed specific ratio value is the reference value. Therefore, even if the specific ratio value as the effective value is not displayed, it is possible to grasp the specific ratio value as a rough guide.

The invention according to means 3 is
In the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2,
The specific display includes a plurality of (for example, four) display areas (first to fourth lighting areas 310 to 340) capable of displaying numbers,
The valid value notifying unit, when notifying that the specific ratio value is a valid value, uses a specific number (for example, “4th lighting region 340) in any one of the plurality of display regions. 1”) is displayed on the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the specific ratio value (effectiveness) as a value that has converged to some extent depending on whether or not a specific number is displayed in any one of the plurality of display areas of the specific display device (effective It is possible to easily determine whether or not the specific ratio value as the value is displayed.

The invention according to means 4 is
In the gaming machine according to means 1,
The effective value notification means,
A game machine characterized in that it is possible to prevent the specific ratio value from being displayed on the specific display device when the number of times of variation measured by the variation number measuring means is less than the predetermined number of revolutions. is there.

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, when the number of times the variation display of the identification symbol is performed is less than the predetermined number of revolutions, the specific display unit does not display the specific ratio value. Therefore, it is possible to determine that the specific ratio value is a value that has converged to some extent (specific ratio value as an effective value) on condition that the specific ratio value is displayed on the specific display device.

The invention according to means 5 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4,
Equipped with a main control board that can control the progress of the game,
The main control board, the ball entry information acquisition means, the hit determination means, the identification symbol control means, the jackpot game execution means, the specific percentage value calculation means, the fluctuation number measurement means, the And an effective value notification means,
The specific display is a game machine characterized by being arranged on the main control board (see FIG. 6).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, the specific display provided on the main control board can display the specific ratio value as an effective value by the control processing of the main control board. That is, the main control board, which is the inspection target for proper operation, displays the specific ratio value as the effective value. Therefore, it is possible to make a person who confirms the specific ratio value grasp the specific ratio value as reliable information.

The invention according to means 6 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The specific ratio value calculating means, as the specific ratio value, is a base (normal base, time saving) which is a ratio of the total number of prize balls acquired by the player to the number of game balls shot by the player. Base, jackpot base) can be calculated,
The effective value notifying unit is configured such that, when the number of fluctuations measured by the number of fluctuations measuring unit is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation speed, the base displayed on the specific display has the number of fluctuations equal to or more than the predetermined rotation speed. Is a game machine characterized by being capable of informing that it is an effective value calculated in a situation (execution of step S2666).

According to the gaming machine of this configuration, the base as an effective value is shown when the number of fluctuations exceeds the predetermined number of rotations. Therefore, it is possible to judge the base more correctly by discriminating whether or not the base is a value that has converged to some extent.

The invention according to means 7 is
In the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5,
The specific ratio value calculating means is capable of calculating, as the specific ratio value, an output ratio that is a ratio of the number of prize balls acquired based on the operation of the winning combination, out of the ratio of the total prize balls acquired by the player. And
The effective value informing means, when the number of fluctuations measured by the number of fluctuations measuring means is equal to or more than the predetermined number of revolutions, the output rate displayed on the specific display device is such that the number of fluctuations is the predetermined number of revolutions. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of informing that the effective value has been calculated in the above situation (executing step S2536).

According to the gaming machine having this configuration, when the number of fluctuations is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of rotations, the output rate as an effective value is shown. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately judge the incidence by discriminating whether or not the incidence is a value that has converged to some extent.

In addition, in the present specification, "establishment of a predetermined control condition" means that the jackpot is won in the lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol, and the jackpot symbol indicating the winning is stopped and displayed. Is.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 80... Main control board 80a... Mounting surface 81... Game control microcomputer 300... Proportion indicator, base display 300a, 300b... Cylindrical part 400A-400E... Main board case 401A-401E... Rear case 401a... Notches 401b, 401c... Shaft member IC9... Integrated circuit

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special game state that is advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined control condition , and can be controlled to a normal game state or a privilege game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ,
Total award ball number measuring means capable of measuring the total award ball number obtained by the player,
A shooting ball number measuring means capable of measuring the number of shooting balls that the game balls shot by the player have flowed down in the game area,
A memory capable of storing at least the normal total prize ball number measured by the total prize ball number measuring means in the normal game state and the normal launch ball number measured by the fire ball number measuring means in the normal game state. Means and
Have a first display region and second display region, display means normally based capable of displaying a fraction of the normal total prize balls count and the normal firing cell count,
A power-on means capable of powering on,
A main control board having a game CPU for controlling the progress of the game and capable of storing processing information of the game CPU;
A RAM clear operation means capable of erasing the stored processing information of the gaming CPU when an operation is performed in response to the power being turned on by the power-on means,
The storage means is capable of holding the stored contents of the normal total prize ball number and the normal shot ball number even if the RAM clear operation means is operated in response to the power-on by the power-on means.
The display means is
When the predetermined display condition is not satisfied, the mode in the first display area is changed to a non-numeric mode different from the numerical mode indicating the normal base ,
In the case where the display condition is satisfied, the number of normally-launched balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on is measured by the number-of-launched balls measurement means after the power is turned on. When the added value obtained by adding the number of normal firing balls is less than a predetermined number, a mode in the first display area is changed to a mode in which the normal base is displayed, and a value in the second display area is changed. The mode is a first mode showing that the normal base is a reference value calculated in a situation where the added value is less than the predetermined number,
In the case where the display condition is satisfied, the number of normally-launched balls held in the storage means when the power is turned on is measured by the number-of-launched balls measurement means after the power is turned on. When the added value obtained by adding the number of normal firing balls is equal to or more than the predetermined number, the mode in the second display region is changed while the mode in the first display region is set to the number mode indicating the normal base. gaming machine usually base, wherein the Ru der possible to the second embodiment shown in that the added value is computed effective value in the situation is the predetermined number or more.

Images